Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Printed in U.S.A.
i
Preface
This manual is intended as the primary technical reference for Sperry Marine’s Voyage Management System
(VMS) products. It is intended to serve as a hardware requirements specification for the VMS software, as a
hardware installation guide, and as a specification for all VMS peripherals and interfaces. The intended audience
includes system engineers and others designing systems using the VMS, as well as service personnel installing
or servicing the VMS.
This manual is organized as a reference, not as a primer or introduction to the subject. First time readers should
scan the Table of Contents to see the organization of the manual or to find specific topics of interest.
Chapter 1: Overview of the Voyage Management System is designed to be a brief introduction to the major
subsystems found in the VMS products and to the general technologies used in interfacing the Planning Station
to the rest of the Integrated Bridge System (IBS).
Chapter 2: Hardware Specifications and Component Configuration contains detailed information about every
major hardware component used in VMS products at this time. Every section contains the part number of the
component - both Sperry Marine’s and the Vendor’s. Drawings of the component help in identification and in
locating configuration and interfacing items, such as switches, jumpers, connectors, etc.
Chapter 3: Software Installation and Maintenance contains the information necessary to install and configure
the VMS software, Windows NT software, and all necessary hardware drivers. There is a section on Off-Line File
Management which covers file maintenance (copying files, etc.) for all the station PCS from a local computer.
Chapter 4: Peripheral and Interface Specifications contains details for interfacing different types of peripheral
and external devices to the VMS.
Appendix A: Configuring VMS-VT contains a copy of the Sperry Marine Document Configuring VMS-VT. This
document contains the information required to setup the VMS CONFIG.INI file.
Appendix B: Drawings contains copies of the cabinet drawings and interconnection diagrams.
Related Publications
VMS-VT Operator’s Manual, JA26-5883. This manual describes the user interface and operation of the VMS-
VT system.
ii
Conventions Used In This Manual
NOTE:
NOTES are intended to emphasize certain important information about a subject.
CAUTION
WARNING!
WARNINGS are the most serious statements of all. They are intended to bring attention
to details of operation or installation which, if ignored, threaten personal injury or even
the safety of the vessel. Pay particular to all WARNINGS!
SAFETY SUMMARY
The following are general safety precautions that are not related to any specific procedures and therefore do
not appear elsewhere in this publication. These are recommended precautions that personnel must understand
and apply during many phases of operation and maintenance.
Observe all safety regulations. Do not replace components or make adjustments inside the equipment with
the high voltage supply turned on. Under certain conditions, dangerous potentials may exist when the power
control is in the off position, due to charges retained by capacitors. To avoid casualties, always remove
power and discharge and ground a circuit before touching it.
Under no circumstances should any person service or adjust the equipment except in the presence of someone
who is capable of rendering aid.
RESUSCITATION
Personnel working with or near high voltages should be familiar with modern methods of resuscitation.
iii
The following warnings/cautions appear in text in this manual and are repeated here for emphasis:
WARNING!
If the chassis ground is removed from the power conditioner, all units receiving power
from the power conditioner must be individually grounded with chassis grounds.
(Page 2-198, 2-205).
WARNING!
There is no over current protection provided on these units. It is highly recommended that a
circuit breaker, or similar protection device, be installed preceding the power conditioner.
(Page 2-200, 2-207).
WARNING!
WARNING!
MAKE SURE THE RETAINING ARMS ARE SECURE AND CANNOT SLOP OR
SPREAD, WRAP DUCT TAPE (OR EQUIVALENT) AROUND THE FIXTURE’S
JOINTS TO PREVENT PINCHING WHEN GRASPED. GLOVES SHOULD ALSO
BE WORN. (Pages 2-84, 2-88).
iv
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
components. PC motherboards contain static sensitive parts, therefore an anti-static
wrist strap should be worn. (Pages 2-6, 2-10).
CAUTION
These switches have been set by the factory for your system. Do not change these
switches from the factory setting. (Page 2-11).
CAUTION
Don’t this switch unless the documentation supplied with the upgrade CPU indicates
the VRE voltage range. (Page 2-11).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards,
cables or components. (Page 2-12).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables. (Pages 2-31, 2-34, 2-40, 2-43, 2-52, 2-54, 2-56, 2-59, 2-62, 2-65, 2-121, 2-126, 2-
136, 2-144, 2-154, 2-165, 2-177, 2-181, 2-184, 2-185, 2-187).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables. (Pages 2-67, 2-70, 2-75, 2-77, 2-79, 2-81, 2-85, 2-89, 2-91)
v
CAUTION
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the ground
terminal provided in the touchscreen cable be firmly grounded to the monitor chassis
using a star washer, and that the monitor, controller, and cabinet all be grounded to
the ship's structure (or earth, in land-based installations). Both the monitor and
touchscreen are powerful generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the
touchscreen controller if not properly shunted to ground. (Page 2-102).
CAUTION
Always wait at least five seconds after turning the monitor or computer power off
before re-applying power. Re-applying power too quickly can cause some
unprotected monitor power supplies to fail. (Page 2-107).
CAUTION
Do not attempt to simply pull the touchscreen free of the monitor's display
tube (CRT). Carefully remove all gasket material which secures the
touchscreen. (Page 2-109, 2-113).
CAUTION
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the ground
terminal provided in the touchscreen cable be firmly grounded to the monitor chassis
using a star washer, and that the monitor, controller, and cabinet all be grounded to
the ship's structure (or earth, in land-based installations). Both the monitor and
touchscreen are powerful generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the
touchscreen controller if not properly shunted to ground. (Page 2-111, 2-115).
vi
CAUTION
Be certain that the touchscreen is not touching any metal surface, and check
that there is approximately 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) clearance between the back
surface of the touchscreen and the front surface of the monitor. (Pages 2-110,
2-114).
CAUTION
Power down the PC before connecting the keyboard cable.( Page 2-118).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing the printer.
(Page 2-191).
CAUTION
Check each unit for proper voltage tap selection per Table 2-42. A voltage tap change
may be required before installation. Insure that the combined power requirements of
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 1440 VA. (Page 2-199).
CAUTION
Check each unit for proper voltage tap selection per Table 2-43. A voltage tap change
may be required before installation. Insure that the combined power requirements of
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 2880 VA. (Page 2-206).
CAUTION
This procedure is specific to the 486/66 processor shipped with VMS-VT systems.
Attempts to upgrade machines other than Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50 may result
in permanent damage to the processor chip and motherboard. Please call
Charlottesville Engineering to ensure compatibility with your system. (Page 2-211).
vii
CAUTION
All parts in this kit are static sensitive. Use the ground strap provided in the kit before
handling any computer components. (Page 2-212).
CAUTION
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any modules
or cables. (Page 2-149, 2-157).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the Relay Assembly.
(Page 2-172).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the CD-ROM drive.
(Page 2-48).
CAUTION
Use of this serial interface could degrade the computer’s system performance. It is
recommended that any system using this interface be upgraded to the RocketPort 16.
(Page 2-140).
CAUTION
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
x
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
2.3.2 Adaptec AHA-2940 SCSI Host Adapter Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1813061 . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.3.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.2.5 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.2.6 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.3.2.7 Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.3.2.8 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.4 Hard Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1 Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.1.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.4.1.5 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.4.1.6 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Hard Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.4.1.7 Potential Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.4.2 Seagate 1.2GB SCSI Hard Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1813064 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.4.2.5 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.4.2.6 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Hard Disk Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.4.2.7 Potential Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5 CD-ROM Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1 NEC Multispin CD-ROM Reader, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.3 Disk Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Inserting A Disk Into The Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Inserting/Removing Cartridge To The Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.1.4 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.5.1.5 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.5.1.6 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
2.5.1.7 Potential Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Diagnostic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Emergency Cartridge Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
xii
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
2.8.4 15" Console Mount Color Display System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812389 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.4.1 Monitor Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.4.2 Monitor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.4.3 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.4.4 Touch screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.4.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.8.5 17" Console Mount Color Display System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812390 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.5.1 Monitor Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.5.2 Application Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.5.3 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.5.4 Touch screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.5.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.8.6 21" Table Top Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812392
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.8.6.1 Monitor Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.8.6.2 Application Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.8.6.3 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.8.6.4 Touch screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.8.6.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.8.7 17" Table Top Color Display System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812395 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.7.1 Monitor Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.7.2 Monitor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.7.3 Monitor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.7.4 Touch screen Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.7.5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
2.8.8 26" Console Mount Color Display System With Touch screen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812581 2-83
2.8.8.1 Monitor Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
2.8.8.2 Monitor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Power Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
xiv
Chapter Title Page
xv
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
2.9.1.6 Software Installation & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-05
.................................................................... 2-102
Installing The Sperry Touchscreen Driver, P/N 1812125-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Installing The Microtouch Touchscreen Driver, P/N 1813232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
2.9.1.7 Software Installing & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-78
.................................................................... 2-106
2.9.1.8 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.9.1.9 Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
2.9.2 MicroTouch 19" Capacitive Touchscreen, Sperry Marine P/N 1978079-2
................................................................ 2-108
2.9.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.4 Removing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
2.9.2.5 Installing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
2.9.2.6 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
2.9.3 MicroTouch 24" Touchscreen, Sperry Marine P/N 1812567 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.4 Replacing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Removing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
2.9.3.5 Installing the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
2.9.3.6 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
2.10 Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.1 IBM-to-PS/2 Keyboard Adapter Cable, Sperry Marine P/N 1813063 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.1.1 Vendor and Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.1.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
2.10.2 Key Tronics KB101 Enhanced Keyboard, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-105 . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.1 Vendor and Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
2.10.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.10.2.5 Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.10.2.6 Software Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.10.2.7 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
2.11 SeaNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.11.1 SeaNET Specifications & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.11.1.1 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
2.11.1.2 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Cable Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
Station Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
2.11.1.3 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
xvi
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
2.11.2 Adtron AE-200LC Ethernet Adapter Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-175 . . . . . . 2-125
2.11.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.5 Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
2.11.2.6 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.11.2.7 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.11.2.8 Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-127
2.12 Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.12.1 Serial Interface Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
2.12.1.1 Electrical Protocols Encountered in Serial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
2.12.1.2 Data Transmission Formats (Not Specified by EIA Standards) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-129
2.12.1.3 Data Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.12.1.4 IBM PC Serial Port Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-130
2.12.1.5 Debugging tools for serial interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
2.12.2 RocketPort 16-Port Serial Interface, Sperry Marine P/N 1812576 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
PC Bus Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Host Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
Serial Port Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132
2.12.2.4 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
RocketPort Controller Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
Connector Interface Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135
2.12.2.5 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
2.12.2.6 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
2.12.2.7 RocketPort Software Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
Changing Device Driver Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
Viewing The Current Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Changing The Default Settings for Boot-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Changing The Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Removing The Device Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
Resolving Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139
2.12.2.8 Common Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.2.9 Replaceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.3 Hostess 550/16 Serial Interface, Sperry Marine P/N 1812346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.3.1 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
2.12.3.2 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
xvii
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
xviii
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
xix
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
xx
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
xxi
TABLE OF CONTENTS - (Continued)
xxii
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1: An Integrated Bridge System Based on the Sperry Marine Voyage Management System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-2: Voyage Management System Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Figure 1-3: Navigation Station Subsystem Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-4: Conning Station Subsystem Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-5: Planning Station Subsystem Part Number Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Figure 1-6: Navigation Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-7: Conning Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1-8: Planning Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 2-1: Young 486/66 Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-2: Installation of SIMM Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-3: Pentium 100MHz Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-4: Location of Pentium Jumpers and DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-5: Pentium AC Power Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-6: Location of SIMM Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-7: Hard Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-8: Hard Disk LED Indicator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-9: Keylock/Power LED Indicator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-10: Fan Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-11: Speaker Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-12: Control Concepts Combination Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-13: Adaptec AHA-2940 SCSI Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-14: Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Figure 2-15: Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Figure 2-16: Seagate 1.2GB SCSI Hard Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Figure 2-17: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Figure 2-18: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Figure 2-19: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Jumper Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Figure 2-20: NEC Multispin CD-ROM Mounting Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Figure 2-21: NEC LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-22: NEC Emergency Cartridge Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Figure 2-23: Teac 3 ½" Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Figure 2-24: Sony 3 ½" Floppy Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Figure 2-25: ATI Mach64 Graphics Card for PCI Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-26: ATI Mach64 Graphics Card for VESA Local Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2-27: ATI Mach32 Graphics Card for VESA Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Figure 2-28: Photron Torpedo Graphics Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Figure 2-29: Assembly Components for 1812352 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Figure 2-30: Assembly Components for 1812386 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Figure 2-31: Mounting Details For 1812386 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Figure 2-32: Rear Panel For 1812386 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Figure 2-33: Assembly Components for 1812388 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Figure 2-34: Mounting Details For 1812388 Display System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Figure 2-35: Rear Panel For 1812388 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
xxiii
LIST OF FIGURES - (Continued)
xxiv
LIST OF FIGURES - (Continued)
xxv
LIST OF TABLES
xxvi
LIST OF TABLES - (Continued)
xxvii
Chapter 1: Overview of the Voyage Management System
The Voyage Management System (VMS) is a family of related products designed to integrate ship's navigation
and control systems. This equipment has been developed for distributing, displaying, correlating, and logging
shipboard data. The VMS automates most of the low-level, routine tasks involved in the conning of a ship,
significantly reducing the stress and workload of bridge personnel. This gives the humans on the bridge more
time for doing the job that they do so much better than machines: making decisions.
Figure 1-1: An Integrated Bridge System Based on the Sperry Marine Voyage Management System
The VMS equipment forms the heart of Sperry Marine's Integrated Bridge Systems (IBS), an example of which
is illustrated in Figure 1-1.
This chapter presents a brief overview of the functionality provided by Sperry Marine Integrated Bridge Systems.
The products comprising the Voyage Management System are described, along with a short history and rationale
of their evolution and a list all of their major components, which are detailed in the second chapter of this manual.
To give a better picture of the use to which this equipment is put, several example systems are described. The
remainder of the chapter provides a brief overview of the VMS's interfaces.
The VMS equipment used for bridge automation is tightly coupled in function to the pre-existing navigation
equipment that it integrates. The equipment serves a "glue" function for building higher-order structures out of
already capable and sophisticated components. The most important functional capabilities of Sperry Marine
integrated bridges which are not available in traditional bridge designs are summarized in the following
paragraphs.
Automatic Data Collection and Distribution – The capability to collect and distribute data from navigation
and environmental sensors automatically – without human intervention – is the foundation upon which all other
integrated bridge capabilities are built. Usually the most important type of sensor data on a ship's bridge is
navigational information: geographic position from any of a variety of position sensing equipment such as a
Global Positioning System (GPS), Loran-C, Decca, Satellite Navigation System (TRANSIT SATNAV), Omega,
etc.; heading from the gyrocompass, the radars, the gyropilot or course made good from the position sensors;
and speed from the speed log, the radars, or the position sensors. Other types of sensor data are also frequently
monitored, such as depth data, weather data and engine room data. The desired suite of sensors and interfaces
is determined by the customer in the design stages of each customized integrated bridge. In the simplest
integrated bridges, it may be sufficient to bring all of this data to one central collection point (a navigation
computer). The bridge systems of most large vessels, however, require SeaNET to distribute all of the data to
all of the equipment which uses it.
Graphical Data Display – After sensor data has been collected, the primary task is to present it to the human
operator(s) of the vessel in a timely fashion, in a form that humans can most readily assimilate. The thousands
of words of data received from all of the navigation sensors can easily be summarized in one simple picture: one's
own ship moving on a chart which depicts all local obstructions, both fixed and moving. This is called an
electronic chart.
Automatic Data Logging – Automatic data collection also makes automatic data archiving possible. The VMS
can automatically log information such as position, heading, speed, wind speed and direction, navigation mode,
and time. The data can be logged either to magnetic storage media, to a printer, or both. The operator can select
the logging devices and the time interval.
Voyage Planning and Monitoring – Computers can simplify many of the computational details of voyage
planning: computing track headings, ETAs to way points, computing Great Circle routes, etc. The track of an
electronically recorded voyage plan may be automatically overlaid on an electronic chart to show the planned
route. Once underway, it is easy to see the ship's position with respect to the plan, and the navigation computers
can compare the actual progress with the plan.
Ship Control – Since the voyage plan represents the desired position of the vessel as a function of time, and the
actual position is also known, the next logical step is to allow the navigation computer to pilot the ship, sending
commands to the autopilot and the engine controls to keep the ship on track and on schedule.
The VMS products have been developed to meet a broad range of bridge integration requirements. At one end
of the spectrum are bridge automation systems designed to allow a single operator to navigate and pilot the ship –
for instance, those designed to conform to Det Norski Veritas's (DNV) Tentative Rules for One-man Bridge
Operation in Ocean Areas and Coastal Waters, the so-
called "Watch-1" specifications. With these systems, the level of automation is quite high – the VMS is directly
piloting the ship throughout much of its voyage – and this means that the requirements for system reliability and
availability are paramount. What this usually translates to in terms of the system design is at least some degree
of redundancy of critical equipment.
The Voyage Management System was designed from the beginning with these requirements in mind. The key
component for implementing large systems incorporating redundancy is SeaNET. All of the other VMS products
are designed to optionally interface to SeaNET, both providing data to and receiving data from the network.
SeaNET's high-speed, deterministic message passing service ensures that all network products are operating with
the same sensor and control information at the same time, allowing one Command Station, for example, to act
as "hot back-up" for another.
At the other end of the system requirements spectrum are the relatively simple "navigation advisory systems,"
which monitor the vessel's progress but do not require the VMS to control the ship directly. Cost of such systems
is frequently a major consideration. For such applications, Sperry Marine offers the Voyage Management System
Vision Technology (VMS-VT), which incorporates most of the VMS functionality in a single navigation
computer.
The core products developed by Sperry Marine for bridge integration and automation are designed around the
IBM Personal Computer (PC) architectural family. This gives them many hardware components in common, and
greatly simplifies the stocking of spare parts and the job of the servicing the equipment. Likewise, much of the
underlying software is shared: their operating systems, their file systems, their network interfaces, and their
peripheral input/output (I/O) systems. The products are distinguished by different applications software that runs
in them, and, in some cases, by the attachment of some unique peripherals.
The distinction between the products, the applications software in the product, and the hardware platform on
which the software runs is very important to understanding the configuration and operation of the VMS
Sperry Marine's IBS products have been designed from the start to be highly modular and configurable, and to
make use of standard, off-the-shelf components where feasible. They are intended to evolve with the state of the
art in personal computers. Indeed, there have already been two generations of VMS hardware to date, as Sperry
Marine has taken advantage of the increasing performance and functionality and lower costs from the very
dynamic personal computer industry.
The paragraphs below describe the principal VMS products of both generations found in Sperry Marine
Integrated Bridge Systems. Each section contains an illustration of the product described, and contains a list of
major subassemblies and components described in detail in Chapter 2: Hardware Specifications and Component
Configuration. Chapter 2 also contains an extensive discussion of SeaNET.
A VMS system is created by combining the various VMS subsystem elements. The particular system
configuration is described by part number according to the following:
VMSVT denotes the Sperry Marine “Vision Technology” Voyage Management System. The part number
describing the VMS subsystem elements are described in the following figures.
Conning Station Subsystem Part Numbering – The part numbering structure is as follows:
The Navigation Station is supplied standard with computer and 16 channel serial interface. The computer is
configured as follows:
The Conning Station is supplied standard with computer and serial interface. The computer is configured as
follows:
The Planning Station is supplied standard with computer, keyboard mouse. The computer is configured as
follows:
The multi-media Voyage Data Recorder was jointly developed by Sperry Marine and Ocean Systems. The Voyage
Recorder is a PC-based recording system for capturing ship navigation/engine data, bridge communications
(voice) and RADAR video output. The data is stored in digital format on the hard disk of a PC. A sound board
records voice communications and a video frame grabber captures the RADAR information. Multiple
microphones and VHF inputs are combined using mixers. Data is acquired through two standard serial ports on
the PC. The software requires serial data in the NMEA-0183 format.
Interfaces between the VMS products and other equipment supply the VMS with real-time sensor data, allow it
to control peripheral equipment, and allow it to exchange charts, NAVLINES, voyage plans, and log data with
other navigation equipment. Some of these interfaces (described in the following paragraphs) are supported by
the products' standard components. Others may require some of the optional interfacing components listed in
Table 1-1.
Synchro Interfaces – Synchro interfaces encode angular position as relative amplitudes of a three-phase
alternating current. This type of signaling is traditionally used in marine systems to transmit such
information as gyrocompass heading, rudder angle, and ship's water speed. A special board in the VMS
workstations (Single/Dual Channel Synchro Interface Board) is used to convert angular synchro information
to digital form. The application software then converts digital synchro angle to the measured parameter
according to setup information contained in a configuration file.
Analog Interfaces – analog interfaces represent some measured parameter – rudder angle, water speed,
etc. – as an electrical value. D.C. voltage is most commonly used, but 4-20 Ma current is also employed.
The VMS workstations use an analog-to-digital (A/D) interface card (DAS-4 ) to make this information
available to the applications software. Similarly, a DAS-1602 digital-to-analog board may be used to supply
analog information or control signals to other systems requiring analog signaling.
Pulse Log Interface – The VMS workstations may be configured to receive speed data from a speed log
with a relay contact closure output (sometimes called pulse output). Although 200 pulse/nmi outputs are by
far the most common, the VMS's inputs can be configured for other pulse rates via software configuration.
Serial Interfaces – The most common form of interface between modern electronic equipment (typified by
GPS receivers, RADARs, and the like) is serial communications. This type of interface is also used between
the VMS and many of its peripherals: digitizers, printers, plotters and touchscreens. There is a variety of
electrical formats which are used for serial interfaces: RS-232, RS-422, and current loop. There is also
considerable variety in the data formats used. Electrical and signaling issues are covered in more detail in
Chapter 2. Configuration of serial ports is covered in Chapter 3, and the format of data message exchange
is covered in Chapter 4.
This chapter covers most of the major replaceable hardware assemblies, subassemblies and components that are
currently being supplied or that have been supplied as Voyage Management System components of Sperry Marine
Integrated Bridge Systems. Items considered to be peripherals – printers, plotters, digitizers, etc. – are not
covered. (Peripheral interfaces are covered in Chapter 4: Peripheral and Interface Specifications).
The introduction to each section contains any general requirements of VMS equipment, if any, for the type of
components covered. The subsections which follow each cover one VMS component; each contains an
illustration of the component to aid in positive identification, along with information concerning the Sperry
Marine and vendor part numbers, and the manufacturer if other than Sperry Marine. Size, weight, and power
requirements are supplied for all major assemblies. Each component subsection describes the applications of the
component – where used, obsolete components, replacements, etc. The component's interfaces and configuration
are described in detail, as well as maintenance and/or software requirements, installation procedure, and any
potential problems encountered.
Since the PC computer family is an integral part of all of Sperry Marine's bridge integration products, it is
important for anyone installing, servicing, or specifying these products to understand the terminology and
architecture of these computers. Such knowledge is assumed in all of the material in this chapter.
The VMS 2500 Stand Mount consists of all the required VMS workstation hardware and software in a rugged,
stand-alone integrated package.
2.1.1.2 Application – The VMS 2500 Stand can be used to build any of the VMS workstations.
2.1.1.3 Interfaces – The external connections to the 2500 Stand are application-specific. The internal
connections are detailed on drawing 1981324, sheet 3. A copy of this is in Appendix B of this manual.
2.1.1.4 Installation – The following table shows the major sub-assemblies for the 2500 Stand. The installation
of these components is covered in detail in other sections of chapter 2.
16 1 A4 1978079-2 Touchscreen.
The VMS-VT 21" Cabinet Assembly consists of all the required VMS workstation hardware and software in
a rugged, stand-alone integrated package. The drawings for the VMS-VT 21" Cabinet Assembly are in Appendix
B of this manual.
2.1.2.1 Manufacturer – The VMS-VT 21" Cabinet is built by Sperry Marine. The cabinet comes in four
versions:
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a floor-standing unit, P/N 1981180-1;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a console-mounted unit, P/N 1981180-3;
2.1.2.2 Application – The VMS -VT 21" Cabinet can be used to build any of the VMS workstations.
2.1.2.3 Interfaces – The external connections to the VMS-VT 21" Cabinet are application-specific. The
internal connections are detailed on drawing 1982493. A copy of this is in Appendix B of this manual.
2.1.2.4 Installation – The following table shows the major sub-assemblies for the 2500 Stand. The installation
of these components is covered in detail in other sections of chapter 2.
The VMS-VT 26" Cabinet Assembly consists of all the required VMS workstation hardware and software in
a rugged, stand-alone integrated package. The drawings for the VMS-VT 26" Cabinet Assembly are in Appendix
B of this manual.
2.1.3.1 Manufacturer – The VMS-VT 26" Cabinet is built by Sperry Marine. The cabinet comes in four
versions:
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a floor-standing unit, P/N 1981181-1;
! VMS-VT Cabinet with touch screen. This is a console-mounted unit, P/N 1981181-3;
2.1.3.2 Application – The VMS -VT 26" Cabinet can be used to build any of the VMS workstations.
2.1.3.3 Interfaces – The external connections to the VMS-VT 26" Cabinet are application-specific. The
internal connections are detailed on drawing 1982493. A copy of this is in Appendix B of this manual.
2.1.3.4 Installation – The following table shows the major sub-assemblies for the 2500 Stand. The installation
of these components is covered in detail in other sections of chapter 2.
2.2.1 Young Microsystems VEGA 486/DX2 66 MHZ Motherboard, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-147
The Young VEGA VS486-3VL is a 80486 66 MHZ motherboard, 256K cache memory, 16MB 80ns memory
and AMI 486 BIOS.
2.2.1.1 Manufacturer –
Young Microsystems.
13825 Cerritos Corporate Drive No. A.
Cerritos, CA 90701.
800-707-8342.
The vendor’s part number is VS486-3VL.
2.2.1.2 Application – This motherboard is used on the 486 shelf mount or table top computer system, Sperry
Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.2.1.3 Interfaces – There is a keyboard connector located on the motherboard. All other interfaces are
provided via the expansion boards.
2.2.1.4 Configuration –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
components. PC motherboards contain static sensitive parts, therefore an anti-static wrist
strap should be worn.
Memory SIMMs – There are 8 4 Megabyte SIMMs to be installed. The Sperry Marine P/N is 1810633-164.
The SIMMs are installed in Memory Bank 0 and Memory Bank 1 (reference Figure 2-8. Orient the SIMMs
to the socket as shown in Figure 2-2.
Location of Expansion Cards – Locate the expansion cards according to Table 2-4: The configuration
details for the cards are provided in the appropriate chapters of this manual.
1 SCSI Adapter
4 Analog Interface
5 Ethernet Adapter
6 Serial Interface
7 SYNCHRO Interface
8 Graphics Adapter
CMOS Setup –
2. Power up the computer. When the memory test is in progress, press Del to enter the Setup Window.
3. Select and modify each item as shown in Table 2-5and 2-6. Use the ARROW KEYS to select items and
the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys the change the value of the selected item.
3. Press Esc to exit the main menu. Then select WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT and press Enter to
complete the setup.
2.2.1.6 Potential Problems – Switches out of position can cause many types of erroneous operation. A CMOS
RAM battery which is weak or dead will cause at the least loss of system time and date when the system is
powered off. Also, a loose or disconnected keyboard connector can prevent proper keyboard operation.
3. Defective keyboard, monitor or some other problem detected by the Power up Self -Test (POST).
2.2.2.1 Manufacturer –
2.2.2.2 Application – This motherboard is part of the Pentium computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.2.2.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-3. The system components and interfaces are as follows:
2.2.2.4 Configuration –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
components. PC motherboards contain static sensitive parts, therefore an anti-static wrist
strap should be worn.
Jumper Blocks/DIP Switches – Reference Figure 2-4. Set the jumpers as follows:
The following table shows the complete configuration options for the jumpers and switches shown in Figure
2-4.
Jumper J1N1 Recovery boot enable jumper. If Pins 1-2 = Normal (default).
the BIOS is corrupted during a
BIOS upgrade, this jumper allows Pins 2-3 = Recovery boot enable.
you to boot the system and recover
the BIOS. (Reference the section
on BIOS).
Jumpers J1A1, J1A2, Secondary cache. These jumpers Cache Size J1A1 J1A2 J3A1
J3A1 must be set according to the
amount of secondary cache 0 KB (default) 1-2 1-2 no jumper
installed. 256 KB 1-2 2-3 no jumper
512 KB 2-3 1-2 1-2
Switches 8,7,6 Reserved. CAUTION: These switches have been set by the
factory for your system. Do not change these switches
from the factory setting.
Switch 5 Enables/disables access to the Off = Access to Setup program enabled (default).
Setup program.
On = Access to Setup program disabled.
On = Clear password.
Switch 2 CPU voltage regulator. Some Off= Default VR mode (3.3 V - 3.465 V).
upgrade may require changing
from the default VR setting to the On = VRE mode (3.465 V - 3.63 V.
VRE setting.
CAUTION: Don’t change this switch unless the
documentation supplied with the upgrade CPU
indicates the VRE voltage range.
Switch 1 ISA bus clock speed. Sets the ISA Off (default) = 8.33 MHZ ( 75 MHZ CPU)
bus to a faster or slower setting. 7.5 MHZ (90 MHZ CPU)
8.33 MHZ (100 MHZ CPU)
7.5 MHZ (120 MHZ CPU)
Reference Figure 2-5. There’s a switch on the panel to select the input voltage for the power supply. Set this
switch for the appropriate voltage. The options are:
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards,
cables or components.
Memory SIMMs – There are two 16 Megabyte 72-pin SIMMs to be installed. The Sperry Marine P/N is
1813062-3. The SIMMs are installed in Memory Bank 0 (reference Figure 2-6).
Mount The Hard Drive – Reference Figure 2-7. The hard drive is installed in the carrier as shown. For
configuration details about the hard drive, reference chapter 2.3.
5 PULL_UP_330
6 Key
7 HD ACTIVE
8 PULL_UP_330
Keylock/Power LED Connector – The connections for the hard disk LED is as shown in the following
figure.
10 Ground
11 KEY LOCK
12 Ground
13 Key
14 LED_PWR
Fan Power Connector – The connections are as shown in the following figure.
10 Ground
11 +12 V (fused)
12 Ground
5 PULL_UP_330
6 Key
7 HD ACTIVE
8 PULL_UP_330
CD-ROM Installation – The CD-ROM is mounted in the center drive bay. For details about configuration
of the CD-ROM, reference chapter 2.5.
Location of Expansion Cards – Locate the expansion cards according to Table 2-8: The configuration details
for the cards are provided in the appropriate chapters of this manual.
1. During computer Boot sequence hit the “F1" key when prompted to enter the BIOS setup routine.
2. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Advanced” menu selection at the top of the screen and press
“ENTER” to select.
Peripheral Configuration
Configuration Mode Manual
NOTE:
IRQ 5 is reserved for the RocketPort Card which is installed at system test. IRQ 10 is
reserved for the Network Interface installed as part of the Pentium Assembly.
14. Press the “ESC” key twice to return to the “Main” menu.
Language English
Boot Options Press Enter
Floppy Options
Floppy A: Installed
Floppy B: Not Installed
17. Press the “ESC” key twice to return to the “Main” menu.
Language English
Boot Options Press Enter
Boot Options
Boot Sequence A: First, Then C:
Language English
Boot Options Press Enter
23. Press the “ESC” key to return to the “Main” menu. Press “F10" to save configuration and exit setup
then press “ENTER”.
2.2.2.6 BIOS Update And Recovery – The system BIOS resides in Flash memory. You can upgrade a Flash
BIOS through software, without taking the system apart or replacing the Flash. This section describes upgrading
the system BIOS from a diskette. This section also includes instructions on recovering from a corrupted BIOS
upgrade.
1. Write down the current Setup selections. This information can be obtained by hitting the <F1> when
prompted during the boot-up sequence.
4. When the Flash upgrade menu appears, choose “Update Flash Memory Areal from a file”.
5. When the menu asks you to enter a path/filename, use the arrow keys to select the .bio file and press
<Enter>.
6. The utility asks for a confirmation that you want to load the new flash into memory. Select “Continue
with Programming.”
8. Re-boot the system and start the Setup program. Press <F5> to reset the BIOS defaults. Then use the
copy of the Setup selections you made at the beginning of this procedure to set the options.
BIOS Recovery – It is unlikely that anything will interrupt the Flash upgrade process. However, if an
interruption occurs that prevents continuing with the upgrade, it is possible the BIOS may be left in an
unusable state. The following procedure describes how to recover from this problem.
NOTE:
Because of the small amount of code available in the non-erasable boot block area, no
video is available to direct the procedure. You must monitor the Flash recovery by
listening to the speaker.
1. Change the “Recovery Boot Enable” jumper (reference Table 2-7) to the Recovery mode position.
4. Listen to the speaker. You should hear beeps in the following sequence:
a) After re-booting the system, the speaker beeps once. This beep marks the beginning of the power
on self test (POST).
b) After a short delay (less than 10 seconds), the speaker beeps again, but a higher frequency. This
marks the beginning of the recovery process. At this point, the system is copying the recovery code
into the Flash device.
c) After about 30 seconds, the speaker beeps twice (again at the higher frequency), marking the end
of the recovery process.
6. Change the “Recovery Boot Enable” jumper back to the Normal position.
7. Leave the upgrade disk in the floppy drive and turn the system on.
2.2.2.7 Potential Problems – Switches out of position can cause many types of erroneous operation. a CMOS
RAM battery which is weak or dead will cause at the least loss of system time and date when the system is
powered off. Finally, a loose or disconnected keyboard connector can prevent proper keyboard operation.
3. Defective keyboard, monitor or some other problem detected by the Power up Self -Test (POST).
4. Defective memory.
2.3.1 Control Concepts Combination I/O Board, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-181
The Control Concepts 16-Bit SCSI, IDE, Floppy, Serial and Parallel Combination Control Card is an ISA-based
product. The card functions as the control center for all devices within the PC, except the monitor.
The manufacturer's reference is “16-Bit SCSI, IDE, Floppy, Serial & Parallel Combination Board”.
2.3.1.2 Application – The Combination I/O board is used in the Pentium PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.3.1.3 Interfaces –
Serial Port Connectors – The serial ports connect to S1 and S2 as shown in Figure 2-12.
2.3.1.4 Hardware Setup Hints – This section provides an discussion of the parameters that need to
considered for hardware setup.
Interrupts And the Serial Port – The first two serial ports are configured with interrupts (the enhanced
version of the board only allows setting interrupts by jumper for the four serial ports). Most serial devices
do not require interrupts. However, if more than two are required, it is possible to wire the board to pick up
1 or 2 additional IRQs. Contact Control Concepts Technical Support about making this modification.
External SCSI Devices – The SCSI connector is designed to support the higher speeds attainable at the
SCSI-2 level. Most external SCSI subsystems have dual Centronics 50-pin connectors for communications.
Therefore, a male SCSI-2 to male Centronics 50-pin cable is required. If necessary, Control Concepts sells
these cables.
Termination – The SCSI bus must be terminated correctly to assure proper operation. The SCSI devices on
each end of the SCSI bus must have terminators installed. All other SCSI devices have terminators removed.
The Combination I/O board is shipped with terminators installed at locations RP4, RP5 and RP6 (These
terminators are located next to the SCSI connector). The internal and external connect to the same SCSI bus,
so both internal external cabling must be considered in determining where terminators are installed.
If only one cable (internal or external) is connected to the host adapter, the terminators must remain installed
in the host adapter. Terminators must also be installed on the device at the farthest end of the cable from the
host adapter. Terminators must be removed from all other attached SCSI devices.
If both an internal and external cable are connected to the host adapter, remove the terminators on the host
adapter and install terminators on the devices at the farthest end of each cable. The instruction manuals for
each SCSI device indicates how the terminators can be removed or replaced.
Table 2-9: Configuration Options For Control Concepts Combination I/O Board
Switch “HD” IDE Enable and Address Select Switch “S2" Serial Port 2 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 IDE Disable 0 0 Disable Serial Port 2
0 1 IDE Enable, Primary Address 1F0-1F7 0 1 3F8: COM 1
1 0 Reserved 1 0 2E8h: COM 4
1 1 IDE Enable, Secondary Address 170-177 1 1 2F8h: COM 2
Switch “FL” Floppy Enable and Address Select Switch “S1" Serial Port 1 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 Floppy Disable 0 0 Disable Serial Port 1
0 1 Floppy Enable, Primary Address 3F0-3F7 0 1 2F8: COM 2
1 0 Reserved 1 0 3E8h: COM 3
1 1 Floppy Enable, Secondary Address 370-37 1 1 3F8h: COM 1
Jumper Block 2 (JB2). This block only applies to the enhanced version of the board.
Switch “M2" Parallel Port 2 Mode Select Switch “S4" Serial Port 4 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 Output Only 0 0 Disable Serial Port 4
0 1 Reserved 0 1 3F8: COM 1
1 0 Bi-directional 1 0 2E8h: COM 4
1 1 Reserved 1 1 2F8h: COM 2
Switch “P2" Parallel Port 2 Address Select Switch “S3" Serial Port 3 Address Select
B A B A
0 0 Disable Parallel Port 2 0 0 Disable Serial Port 3
0 1 378h: LPT1 0 1 2F8: COM 2
1 0 3BCh: Usually LPT3 1 0 3E8h: COM3
1 1 278h: LPT2 1 1 3F8h: COM 1
Jumper Block 3 (JB3). Switch D7 and D5 are not used. Reference Jumper Block 6 for setting the other jumpers.
S1 or S3 as well as S2 or S4 may have an interrupt jumpered, BUT NOT BOTH. Most devices that connect to a serial port do not need
an interrupt at all. Devices which usually require an interrupt on a serial port are mice and a variety of MODEMS. Serial printers do not
usually have an interrupt.
JPS1 JPS0 Device Interrupt Also Jumper RA1 RA0 ROM Address
Out Out INT 11 JB3-11 Out Out C8000h
Out In INT 15 JB3-15 Out In CC000h
In Out INT 10 JB3-10 In Out D8000h
In In INT 12 JB3-12 In In DC000h
This jumper enables the ROM chip which contains the BIOS
call to INT 13, thus making SCSI devices bootable.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables
8) Install the SCSI to connector “SCSI”. Ensure that termination resistors are installed at the extreme ends
of the SCSI chain.
2.3.1.7 Software Installation – The drivers for the board are installed during the installation of Windows NT
(chapter 3 of this manual).
2.3.1.9 Common Problems – Whenever two or more PC adapter cards use I/O addresses or hardware
interrupts, the potential for conflict with each other exists. If such a conflict occurs, the symptom is that one or
both adapters will fail to operate, or will function erratically. If such a conflict is suspected, all peripheral
adapters save one may be removed, then re-added one at a time.
The AHA-2940 provides a SCSI interface for the Pentium Vision computers.
2.3.2.1 Manufacturer –
Adaptec, Inc.
691 South Milpitas Blvd.
Milpitas, CA 95035
USA
Phone 800-934-2766.
2.3.2.2 Application – This SCSI adapter board is used in a IBM-PC, Sperry P/N 1820488.
PC Bus Interface – The card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
2.3.2.4 Configuration – The Adaptec AHA-2940 configuration is stored and controlled by on-card firmware.
When the card is installed, there is an option during PC boot-up to change the settings.
2.3.2.5 Hardware Installation – Installing the Adtron Ethernet Adapter Card consists of following:
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables
2) Set the proper configuration options. The default SCSI ID for the AHA-2940 is 7. If necessary, this
address can be changed during the boot-up routine, detailed in the software installation section.
1. Power down the PC, Sperry P/N 1820488. Verify the SCSI ID for the hard disk. The SCSI hard disk
must be set to a SCSI ID of 0.
2. Restart the computer by applying power. During computer’s boot sequence, the following prompt
appears: Press <Ctrl> for SCSISelect (TM) Utility!
3. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Configure/View Host Adapter Settings” menu selection in the
middle of the screen and press “ENTER” to select.
Options
4. From the “Configuration” menu use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light the “Boot Device Options” menu and
press “Enter”.
Additional Options
Boot Device Options...................... Press <Enter>
SCSI Device Configuration............. Press <Enter>
Advanced Configuration Options.... Press <Enter>
Additional Options
Boot Device Options............................ Press <Enter>
SCSI Device Configuration................. Press <Enter>
Advanced Configuration Options.......... Press <Enter>
SCSI Device ID #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7
Initiate Sync Negotiation yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Maximum Sync Transfer Rate 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Enable Disconnection yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
Additional Options
Boot Device Options............................ Press <Enter>
SCSI Device Configuration................. Press <Enter>
Advanced Configuration Options.......... Press <Enter>
10. Press “ESC” three (3) times to page back to the “Exit Utility ?” menu. Use the “Arrow Keys” to hi-light
“Yes” and press “ENTER” to exit the Adaptec SCSI Utility. Press any key to reboot the computer.
2.4.1 Seagate 545MB SCSI Hard Drive, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-186
2.4.1.1 Manufacturer –
2.4.1.2 Application – This hard drive is used in the ‘486 PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.4.1.3 Interfaces – The hard drive connects to the computer’s power supply and to the SCSI interface card.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and SCSI cable before mounting the hard
drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps 3 & 4 in
reverse order.
3) Thread the power cable and SCSI cable through the drive bay (if step 4 is performed first, ignore this).
Install the cables to the drive.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
1. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn on
the PC power.
2. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again. Use the "Fdisk" command
to set up partitions on the hard disk. Do Not install DOS on the hard disk !!!
3. Select CREATE DOS PARTITION by entering "1". Then enter "1" again to CREATE PRIMARY DOS
PARTITION.
6. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again.
8. At the prompt VOLUME LABEL (11 Characters, Enter for None), press “Enter”.
3. The termination resistors are not installed and should be (or vice versa).
2.4.2.1 Manufacturer –
2.4.2.2 Application – This hard drive is used in the Vision Pentium PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.4.2.3 Interfaces – The hard drive connects to the computer’s power supply and to the Fast SCSI interface
card.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and SCSI cable before mounting the hard
drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps 3 & 4 in
reverse order.
3) Thread the power cable and SCSI cable through the drive bay (if step 4 is performed first, ignore this).
Install the cables to the drive.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
1. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn on
the PC power.
2. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again. Use the "Fdisk" command
to set up partitions on the hard disk. Do Not install DOS on the hard disk !!!
3. Select CREATE DOS PARTITION by entering "1". Then enter "1" again to CREATE PRIMARY DOS
PARTITION.
6. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again.
8. At the prompt VOLUME LABEL (11 Characters, Enter for None), press “Enter”.
3. The termination resistors are not installed and should be (or vice versa).
The NEC Multispin CD-ROM operates at different speeds according to the disk in use. The drive features a front-
panel LCD display and built-in diagnostics. The drive is a SCSI device and fits into a standard IBM-PC
compatible drive bay.
2.5.1.1 Manufacturer –
2.5.1.2 Application – The NEC CD-ROM Reader is used in the VMS-VT computer system, Sperry Marine
P/N 1820488.
2.5.1.3 Disk Cartridge – The NEC CD-ROM Reader uses a disk cartridge (also known as a disk caddy) to
protect the CD.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to place CD-ROMs into the reader without using the cartridge.
1. Grip the sides of the cartridge and open the transport cover by pressing on the end tabs and lifting the
cover from the edge.
2. Place the CD-ROM disk into the cartridge with the label side up.
3. Close the cover and press down on both sides of the cartridge. Make sure both sides lock securely with
a “snap” sound.
NOTE:
If the cartridge cover is not locked properly, the CD-ROM reader may malfunction or be damaged when
the cartridge is inserted into the drive.
2. Make sure the reader is powered on before attempting insert a cartridge. Slowly insert the cartridge end
that’s indicated by the arrow on the cartridge. The cartridge is drawn into the drive by a motor.
3. To remove a cartridge, open the dust door completely and the cartridge is ejected.
2.5.1.4 Interfaces – Reference figure 2-18. The CD-ROM drive connects to computer power and the SCSI
adapter. The PC bus interface is described in the Configuration section, below. There are no other external
interfaces.
2.5.1.5 Configuration – Figure 2-19 shows the configuration jumper block. The two configuration parameters
are the SCSI Device ID and the Termination Resistors. The CD-ROM drive can have any SCSI ID except: SCSI
ID #0 or #7. These are reserved for the hard drive and SCSI controller. Table 2-10 shows the jumper settings.
Jumpers
SCSI ID
1 2 3
1 Installed
2 Installed
3 Installed Installed
4 Installed
5 Installed Installed
6 Installed Installed
The SCSI bus must have termination resistors at both ends of the device chain. This means that the SCSI adapter
has termination resistors because it’s (normally) physically at the start of the chain. The CD-ROM drive requires
termination resistors only if it is physically at the end of the cable.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the CD-ROM drive.
2. The SCSI controller card must already be installed and functioning properly. Reference chapter 2.2 of
this manual.
3. If the CD-ROM drive is at the end of the SCSI cable, the SCSI hard disk must already be installed.
4. Install the mounting rails to the CD-ROM drive as shown in Figure 2-20.
5. Set the SCSI Device ID according to Table 2-10. If the CD-ROM drive is at the end of the device chain,
installation the termination resistors as shown in Figure 2-19.
NOTE: It usually is easier to install the power cable and SCSI cable before mounting the CD-
ROM drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps 6
& 7 in reverse order.
6. Thread the power and SCSI cables through the drive bay and connect to drive (if step 7 is performed
first, ignore this). Install the cables. For the SCSI cable, note that the stripped edge must be installed
at pin one of the connector, denoted by an arrow (–).
3. The termination resistors are not installed and should be (or vice versa).
Diagnostic Mode – The drive’s diagnostic mode provides error codes on the LCD display (Reference
Figure 2-21). To start the diagnostic mode perform the following steps:
1. Insert any data CD into the disk cartridge and insert the cartridge into the CD-ROM reader.
3. Press and hold the Play/Pause button while turning power on the computer.
4. If any problems are detected an error code is displayed. Table 2-11 lists the error codes.
E2, E3 or E4 The reader is unable to read the 1. Make sure the disk is
disk. properly oriented and
inserted.
2. Make sure the disk is a data
disk, not music.
3. Try another disk.
3. Reference Figure 2-22. Insert a steel rod about 1.2 mm in diameter (a stiff paper clip may be used) into
the emergency eject hole on the front of the reader and push firmly until the cartridge ejects.
2.6.1.1 Manufacturer –
Teac America.
7773 Telegraph Road.
Montebello, CA 90640.
213-726-0303.
The vendor’s part number is 19307322-17104.
2.6.1.2 Application – This floppy drive is used in the VMS-VT ‘486 computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-
50.
2.6.1.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-23. There are two electrical interfaces: power and controller board.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
2. The floppy drive controller card must already be installed and functioning properly. Reference chapter
2.3 of this manual.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and controller card cable before mounting
the floppy drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps
3 & 4 in reverse order.
3. Thread the power and controller cables through the drive bay and connect to drive (if step 4 is performed
first, ignore this). Install the cables. For the power cable, note the orientation of the red and black wires
on the connector. For the controller cable, pin 1 is located at the end close to the power connector.
The Sony floppy drive, shown in Figure 2-23, is an IBM-PC compatible 1.44 MB floppy drive.
2.6.2.1 Manufacturer –
2.6.2.2 Application – This floppy drive is used in the VMS-VT 2500 Console System, Sperry Marine P/N
1981324.
2.6.2.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-24. There are two electrical interfaces: power and controller board.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
2. The floppy drive controller card must already be installed and functioning properly.
NOTE:
It usually is easier to install the power cable and controller card cable before mounting
the floppy drive into the bay. However, if the cables are not long enough, perform steps
3 & 4 in reverse order.
3. Thread the power and controller cables through the drive bay and connect to drive (if step 4 is performed
first, ignore this). Install the cables. For the power cable, note the orientation of the red and black wires
on the connector. For the controller cable, pin 1 is located at the end close to the power connector.
The VMS workstations require a color graphics card and monitor as their primary display system. The Pentium
computer (Sperry Marine P/N 1820488) uses graphics card Sperry P/N 1813060. The 486 computer (Sperry
Marine P/N 1810633-50) can be configured with P/N 1812384 or 1812819.
2.7.1 ATI Technologies Mach64 Graphics Card, Sperry Marine P/N 1813060
The ATI Technologies Mach64 is a high performance 64-bit graphics accelerator card. The Mach64 provides
16.7 million colors (at 1280x1024) and 65,000 colors at 1600x1200 resolution.
2.7.1.1 Manufacturer –
2.7.1.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the Pentium computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.7.1.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a PCI compatible expansion slot. The card provides a standard VGA
connector for the monitor.
640x480 60 Hz non-interlaced;
800x600 60 Hz non-interlaced;
1024x768 60 Hz non-interlaced;
1280x1024 60 Hz non-interlaced.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
BIOS Setup – The purpose of this section is to program the “On Card BIOS” of the ATI Mach64 card. By
selecting all of the common interface modes, the card is programmed so that they can be later selected in the
windows environment. The following procedure must be accomplished from a DOS environment and is not
supported under Windows NT. Perform the following steps:
2. This procedure must be done from DOS. Reference chapter 3 for instructions on accessing DOS.
3. Insert the Graphics Xpression Disk #1 and enter the command "Install".
5. When prompted with the MONITOR SELECTION MENU, select and enter CUSTOM (notice a
"WARNING" appears). Press <Enter>.
6. Select and enter "640x480". Select "60 hz Non-Interlaced". Use the monitor controls to center and size
the screen. Press <Enter> again to accept the screen position.
8. Select and enter "1024x768". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
9. Select and enter "1280x1024". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
10. Press "Esc" to exit. When prompted with "IS YOUR CUSTOM MONITOR CONFIGURATION NOW
COMPLETE (Y/N)?" enter "Y".
Verify -
11. Type "Y" to "SAVE CONFIGURATION". Finally press <Enter> to save and press "Esc" to exit. When
prompted DO YOU WISH TO EXIT THE INSTALLATION (Y/N)? type "Y".
1. From Windows NT, run the Windows “NT DISPLAY” program located in the Control Panel.
3. Select “CHANGE”.
4. Select “OTHER”.
5. Insert the mach64 Windows NT Driver disk into the floppy drive. Specify the location of the driver as
A:\NT35.
8. Restart Windows NT. Select a desired display mode in the Display applet.
The ATI Technologies Mach64 is a high performance 64-bit graphics accelerator card. The Mach64 provides
16.7 million colors (at 1280x1024) and 65,000 colors at 1600x1200 resolution.
Figure 2-26: ATI Mach64 Graphics Card for VESA Local Bus
2.7.2.1 Manufacturer –
2.7.2.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the 486 PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.7.2.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a VESA Local Bus slot.
2.7.2.4 Configuration – The ATI Mach64 is configured for the following video resolutions:
640x480 60 Hz non-interlaced;
800x600 60 Hz non-interlaced;
1024x768 60 Hz non-interlaced;
1280x1024 60 Hz non-interlaced.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing and cards or
cables.
1. Reference Figure 2-26. This card contains three jumpers for selecting interrupt IRQ2, IRQ3 or
IRQ5. These jumpers are reserved for use by the vendor, and therefore should not be set.
BIOS Setup – The purpose of this section is to program the “On Card BIOS” of the ATI Mach64 card. By
selecting all of the common interface modes, the card is programmed so that they can be later selected in the
windows environment. The following procedure must be accomplished from a DOS environment and is not
supported under Windows NT. Perform the following steps:
2. This procedure must be done from DOS. Reference chapter 3 for instructions on accessing DOS.
3. Insert the Graphics Xpression Disk #1 and enter the command "Install".
5. When prompted with the MONITOR SELECTION MENU, select and enter CUSTOM (notice a
"WARNING" appears). Press <Enter>.
6. Select and enter "640x480". Select "60 hz Non-Interlaced". Use the monitor controls to center and size
the screen. Press <Enter> again to accept the screen position.
7. Select and enter "800x600". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
8. Select and enter "1024x768". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
10. Press "Esc" to exit. When prompted with "IS YOUR CUSTOM MONITOR CONFIGURATION NOW
COMPLETE (Y/N)?" enter "Y".
Verify -
11. Type "Y" to "SAVE CONFIGURATION". Finally press <Enter> to save and press "Esc" to exit. When
prompted DO YOU WISH TO EXIT THE INSTALLATION (Y/N)? type "Y".
1. From Windows NT, run the Windows “NT DISPLAY” program located in the Control Panel.
3. Select “CHANGE”.
4. Select “OTHER”.
5. Insert the mach64 Windows NT Driver disk into the floppy drive. Specify the location of the driver as
A:\NT35.
8. Restart Windows NT. Select a desired display mode in the Display applet.
2.7.3.1 Manufacturer –
2.7.3.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the 486 Vision computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.7.3.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a VESA Local Bus expansion slot. The card provides a standard VGA
connector for the monitor.
2.7.3.4 Configuration – The ATI Utra Pro Mach32 is configured for the following video resolutions:
640x480 60 Hz non-interlaced;
800x600 60 Hz non-interlaced;
1024x768 60 Hz non-interlaced;
1280x1024 60 Hz non-interlaced.
The Ultra Pro Mach32 card has jumpers for enabling IRQs, however the manufacturer instructs not to set these
jumpers.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
4. Insert the Ultra Pro Mach32 card into a VESA Local Bus expansion slot.
BIOS Setup –
2. This procedure must be done from DOS. Reference chapter 3 for instructions on accessing DOS.
3. Insert the Ultra Pro Disk #1 and enter the command "Install".
4. Select and enter "Set Power Up Configuration". Select and enter “MONITOR TYPE”. Then select and
enter “CUSTOM”. Notice that a “WARNING” appears. Press <Enter?> to continue.
5. Select and enter "640x480". Select "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Use the monitor controls to center
and size the screen. Press <Enter> again to accept the screen position.
6. Select and enter "800x600". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
8. Select and enter "1024x768". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
9. Select and enter "1280x1024". Select and enter "60 HZ NON-INTERLACED". Follow the instructions
to change the screen size and position. Press <Enter> when complete.
10. Press <Esc> to exit. When prompted with "IS YOUR CUSTOM MONITOR CONFIGURATION
NOW COMPLETE (Y/N)?" enter "Y".
Installing Windows NT Driver – Windows NT is shipped with drivers for this graphics card.
This is a single frequency high resolution graphics card. It is used with the Barco 26" and other single frequency
monitors, such as upgrades for old VMS installations.
2.7.4.1 Manufacturer –
2.7.4.2 Application – This graphics card is used in the 486 PC, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
2.7.4.3 Interfaces – The card fits into a standard VESA Local Bus expansion slot.
2.7.4.4 Configuration – The Photron Torpedo card is configured for the following operation:
No interrupts;
Memory 1MB;
Connect RGB;
1280x1024 resolution.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
2.7.4.6 Software Installation – This card contains the standard video BIOS extension. No additional software
setup is required.
The Vision Display Systems consist of the monitor, touch screen (if used), and installation hardware. The
following table details the display systems:
1812352-1 1812573-1 no
1812352-2 1812573-2 no
1812386 1812357-1 no
1812389 1812571-1 no
1812390 1812572-1 no
1812395-1 1812572-1 no
1812395-2 1812572-2 no
1812582 1812710 no
1980555 1812571-1 no
1980555-2 1812571-2 no
Power Requirements –
Environmental –
2.8.1.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a monitor.
2.8.1.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any monitors
or cables.
Environmental –
Image Controls – The controls are located at the rear of the monitor as shown in Figure 2-32. Adjust
the controls for the best image.
Degaussing – The screen can be degaussed using the degaussing button. Also, degaussing occurs during
power on.
2.8.2.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
2. Figure 2-30 references a support angle bracket that must be supplied by the shipyard. The mounting
details using the bracket are shown in Figure 2-31.
3. Reference Figure 2-71. Connect the power and VGA cables to the rear panel. Connect the cable
harness from the control panel to the remote connector on the rear panel.
Environmental –
Image Controls – The controls are located at the rear of the monitor as shown in Figure 2-35. Adjust
the controls for the best image.
Degaussing – The screen can be degaussed using the degaussing button. Also, degaussing occurs during
power on.
2.8.3.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
2. Figure 2-34 references a support angle bracket that must be supplied by the shipyard. The mounting
details using the bracket are shown in Figure 2-34.
3. Reference Figure 2-35.Connect the power and VGA cables to the rear panel. Connect the attached
cable from the control panel to the Remote connector at the rear panel of the monitor.
Environmental –
2.8.4.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a touch screen.
2.8.4.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
3. Set the SYNC switch (located on the back of the monitor) to the ON position.
Environmental –
2.8.5.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a touch screen.
2.8.5.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
3. Set the SYNC switch (located on the back of the monitor) to the ON position.
1812722-1 21" NEC XE21 monitor with touch 1812573-2 21" NEC XE21 monitor with touch
screen screen
1812480-7 Video cable 1812480-7 Video cable
1820177 Support 1820177 Support
1981800 Clamp 1981800 Clamp
1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam 1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam
Power Requirements –
Environmental –
2.8.6.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
1812572-1 17" NEC XP17 monitor 1812572-2 17" NEC XP17 monitor
1820177 Support 1820177 Support
1980722 Clamp 1980722 Clamp
1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam 1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam
Power Requirements –
Environmental –
2.8.7.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a touch screen.
2.8.7.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
1. The first step is to remove the swivel from the monitor. Remove the screws recessed in the base.
2. Reference Figure 2-39. Install the rubber monitor support centered under the front of the monitor.
Recess the support from the front approximately 45 millimeters to allow access to the monitor
controls.
4. Install the monitor clamp flush with the front of the monitor and secure with four screws or bolts
through the 7 millimeter holes in the clamp base.
1812581-1 System
Environmental –
Image Controls – The controls are located as shown in Figure 2-40. Adjust the controls for the best
image.
Degaussing – The screen can be degaussed using the degaussing button. Also, degaussing occurs during
power on.
1. The weight of this monitor requires that at least two people are used to lift and transport it. Sperry
Marine provides a fixture for this purpose, shown in Figure 2-41. The part number for the transport
fixture is T968790.
WARNING!
MAKE SURE THE RETAINING ARMS ARE SECURE AND CANNOT SLIP OR
SPREAD. WRAP DUCT TAPE (OR EQUIVALENT) AROUND THE FIXTURE’S
JOINTS TO PREVENT PINCHING WHEN GRASPED. GLOVES SHOULD ALSO
BE WORN.
2.8.8.6 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
1812582-1 System
Environmental –
Image Controls – The controls are located as shown in Figure 2-44. Adjust the controls for the best
image.
Degaussing – The screen can be degaussed using the degaussing button. Also, degaussing occurs during
power on.
2.8.9.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a touch screen.
1. The weight of this monitor requires that at least two people are used to lift and transport it. Sperry
Marine provides a fixture for this purpose, shown in Figure 2-45. The part number for the transport
fixture is T968790.
WARNING!
MAKE SURE THE RETAINING ARMS ARE SECURE AND CANNOT SLIP OR
SPREAD. WRAP DUCT TAPE (OR EQUIVALENT) AROUND THE FIXTURE’S
JOINTS TO PREVENT SKIN PINCHING WHEN GRASPED. GLOVES SHOULD
ALSO BE WORN.
2.8.9.6 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
1812571-1 15" NEC XP15 monitor 1812571-2 15" NEC XP15 monitor
1820177 Support 1820177 Support
1980554 Clamp 1980554 Clamp
1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam 1819677-16 Self-adhesive foam
Power Requirements –
Environmental –
2.8.10.4 Touch screen Setup – This display system does not use a touch screen.
2.8.10.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any
monitors or cables.
1. Remove the tilt base from the monitor. This is done by removing the single securing screw located at
the bottom of the tilt base.
2. Reference Figure 2-48. Install the rubber monitor support such that the front of the monitor is
elevated and the front switch cover opens freely.
4. Install the monitor clamp flush with the front of the monitor. Secure with four mounting bolts.
6. Set the SYNC switch (located on the back of the monitor) to the ON position.
This section covers several Vision monitors that are part the same NEC product Line:
2.8.11.1 Manufacturer –
Control Function
BNC/D-Sub (XP17 & XP21 only) Down position selects D-subminiature video input
connector. Up position selects BNC.
LED power indicator Located left of the power switch. Indicates the
monitor power mode.
Mode LED
On green
Standby yellow
Suspend, off orange
Power off no light
2.8.11.3 Setup/Adjustments –
1. Adjust the image for size, position and color using the On-Screen Manager, explained below. The
On-Screen Managed is engaged by pressing the one of the control buttons or the proceed button.
2. Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image using the front panel controls.
On-Screen Manager (OSM) – Adjusting the image quality is done via the OSM. The OSM main
provides the following selections:
control +/- moves the bar in the + or - direction for color adjustment.
Also selects the color setting (1 through 5)
AccuColor proceed proceed to next control in submenu.
GlobalSync (XP21 this adjustment is made adjusts color impurities caused by earth’s magnetic field.
only) whenever the proceed
button is pressed
The MicroTouch touchscreen controller is the electronic communication and control portion of a system which
allows the position of a touch from a human finger on a computer screen to be sensed, thereby allowing the
operator to directly interact with and control a graphical display. The touchscreen controller excites the conductive
surface bonded to the tempered glass of the touchscreen itself. Touching the screen with a finger or other
conductive object changes the capacitance in such a way that the controller can determine the position of the
touch. The controller then communicates this touch and position information via a serial port to the host
computer.
2.9.1.2 Application – The touchscreen controller is used with the Vision touchscreens:
2.9.1.3 Interfaces – The touchscreen controller connects to the COM1 serial port. The controller receives
electrical power from either a separate power supply or from the PC keyboard connector via a cable tap.
Power Requirement – The controller requires 5 VDC ±5%, 70-80 mA & 100 mV maximum ripple.
Touchscreen Cable – The connector for the touchscreen is located through an access slot on the underside
of the controller.
Adapter Cable – This cable is attached to the controller. The connector at the other end of the cable plugs
into COM1. That connector also has a DC power jack to accommodate the external power source.
Keyboard Power Cable – Reference Figure 2-52. This cable connects between the keyboard and the
keyboard connector on the PC. P1 connects to the PC. J1 connects to the keyboard. P3 connects the adapter
cable DC power jack.
CAUTION
Before connecting/disconnecting cables to the controller, turn off power to the computer
and monitor.
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the ground terminal
provided in the touchscreen cable be firmly grounded to the monitor chassis using a star
washer, and that the monitor, controller, and cabinet all be grounded to the ship's
structure (or earth, in land-based installations). Both the monitor and touchscreen are
powerful generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the touchscreen controller
if not properly shunted to ground.
2. The touchscreen must already be installed. Be sure the ground connection exists.
3. Connect the interface cable from the touchscreen to the controller. The connector is located on the
underside of the controller.
4. Reference Figure 2-53. Mount the controller to the back of the monitor.
5. Connect the adapter cable to COM1 of the PC. If necessary, reference chapter 2.15 to determine the
location of COM1.
NOTE:
During calibration, the touchscreen is installed on COM 1. During normal operation, the
touchscreen is installed on COM 2 if driver P/N 1812125-501 is used. If driver P/N
1813232 is used, the touchscreen is permanently installed on COM 1.
6. Connect the keyboard power cable (P1) to the keyboard connector. Note that for the Pentium PC (Sperry
Marine P/N 1820488), this connection instead goes to the IBM-to-PS/2 adapter cable.
8. Connect the keyboard power cable’s +5 VDC (P3 end) to the DC power jack on the adapter cable.
2.9.1.6 Software Installation & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-05 – There are two
touchscreen driver options. Driver 1812125-501 supports the touchscreen only and requires re-booting the
computer for calibration. Driver 1813232 supports the mouse and touchscreen and doesn’t require re-booting
for calibration.
1. Boot the computer into MS-DOS (not Windows NT) by inserting the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22
Installation Disk #1 into the floppy drive and turn on PC power. Be certain the touchscreen controller
is connected to COM 1 for calibration.
2. When the DOS prompt appears, insert the Touchscreen Driver Installation Disk (1812125-501) into
"A" drive and enter:
"copy a:\sermouse.sys c:\winnt35\system32\drivers".
4. Change to the C: drive by entering "c:". Then enter "md mts" followed by "cd mts" and copy the MS-
DOS setup tool into the C:\MTS directory by entering "copy a:\mts\. c:\mts".
MICROCAL.DOC
MICROCAL.HLP
MICROCAL.EXE
RELEASE.DOC
5. Enter "microcal" from the C:\MTS directory and press the <space> bar to initiate the program.
Select DIAGNOSTICS followed by FIND TOUCHSCREEN and SERIAL. Verify the communication
parameters listed in the STATUS window are as shown below:
(If not, select EXIT TO MAIN MENU followed by CONFIGURE and COMMUNICATION
PARAMETERS. Then select N72 and press "Enter" followed by "Y" to continue). Select GO TO
MAIN MENU.
Select CONFIGURE again followed by AUTOBAUD DETECTION. Then select DISABLE and "Y"
to continue.
Select EXIT TO MAIN MENU. Select DIAGNOSTICS followed by FIND TOUCHSCREEN and
SERIAL. Verify the communication parameters listed in the STATUS window are as follows:
6. Select EXIT TO MAIN MENU. Then press the <F4> key to enter terminal mode. Press the CAPS
LOCK key. Then enter
8. Touch the Lower Left Corner of the screen. The terminal response should be "1".
Touch the Upper Right Corner of the screen. The terminal response should be a "0" or "1" (depends on
version of Microcal).
9. Press <F10> to exit the terminal mode and enter the MAIN MENU.
10. When complete press the F3 function key to test the touchscreen. Draw lines from the center to the four
sides and corners of the display. When complete, press ESC to exit the DRAW MODE.
11. Turn off the computer. Then remove the TOUCHSCREEN CABLE and replace the MOUSE on COM1.
Remove the disk from drive A: and turn the computer back on. Then enter WINDOWS NT.
12. Open a COMMAND PROMPT (MS-DOS) window and edit the registry by entering "REGEDT32".
Then select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE followed by SYSTEM, CURRENTCONTROLSET,
SERVICES, SERMOUSE, and PARAMETERS.
Select "EDIT" (by using ALT - E) followed by "ADD VALUE". Then at the VALUE NAME prompt
type (but DO NOT enter) "Override Hardware Bitstring" (pay attention to the CAPITAL LETTERS).
At the DATA TYPE prompt select "REG_DWORD" and press "OK". Then at the DATA prompt type
"01" for COM1. Also verify the RADIX HEX block is selected.
NOTE:
The touchscreen must be installed to the monitor before attempting calibration. Reference
chapter 2.9.2 or 2.9.3 for installation.
13. Finally "shutdown" NT and turn off the computer. Replace the MOUSE with the TOUCHSCREEN
CABLE on COM1 and re-boot the computer into WINDOWS NT. Enter "touchcal" at the
C:\USERS\INSTALL prompt and touch each CALIBRATION CROSS and select ACCEPT when
finished.
1. Insert the MicroTouch Driver disk (1813232) into drive A and re-boot. Be certain the touchscreen
controller is connected to COM 1.
3. Select the Config menu. Select Communications Parameters, then select N81 from the list.
6. Select Disable, type “Y” at the warning window, and select 4800 from the list.
7. Press the <Enter> key to move to the main menu, and ESC to exit the program.
8. Re-boot the computer into Windows NT, then open a DOS window.
cd\ <Enter>
md mtsnt <Enter>
cd mtsnt
10. Insert the driver disk (1813232) into the A: drive and change to the A: drive.
11. Type the following to install the drivers libraries and controls:
install a: c:\mtsnt
12. A window appears. Select bus 1, com 1 4800 baud. Press ok and ok again.
cd mtsnt <Enter>
winpanel <Enter>
14. Select ok and then yes. This creates the registry variables for the driver.
15. Type:
regedt32 <Enter>
16. On the right side of the window there will be a variable, TapMode.
18. Move to Hkey_Local_Machine, CurrentControlSet, Services, Sermouse, Parameters. On the right side
of the window there is a variable OverrideHardwareBitstring. This variable must be deleted. Press the
<Delete> key and select Yes at the warning window.
19. Exit the registry and re-boot. The touchscreen should now be active.
NOTE:
The touchscreen must be installed on the monitor before attempting calibration.
Reference chapter 2.9.2 or 2.9.3 for installation.
Calibration is performed under VMS-VT. A button appears on the System Menu to allow the user
to calibrate. To set this up, the CONFIG.INI file must be edited to included the touchscreen.
Reference Appendix A of this manual for the procedure.
2.9.1.7 Software Installing & Calibration For MicroTouch Controller, P/N 14-78 –
1. Insert the Microcal program disk (1813232) into drive A and re-boot. Be certain the touchscreen
controller is connected to COM 1.
2. From the Microcal main screen, press <F4> to enter terminal mode. All commands must be uppercase.
<Ctrl> A
“AD”
<Enter>
The touchscreen controller should respond with “00" or “01". This should disable the autobaud detect.
<Ctrl> A
“PN813"
<Enter>
These commands should set the controller for no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and 4800 baud.
5. Use the on-screen instructions to exit from terminal mode and the Microcal program.
2.9.1.8 Common Problems – One problem frequently experienced by service personnel, in particular, is the
problem of a (temporarily) non-responsive touchscreen. This sometimes occurs if the technician touches the
touchscreen with the bezel raised, then lowers the bezel with the power still applied. The touchscreen controller's
calibration can be lost when this occurs. It is cured simply by turning the power off, waiting at least five seconds,
then turning the power back on.
Always wait at least five seconds after turning the monitor or computer power off before
re-applying power. Re-applying power too quickly can cause some unprotected monitor
power supplies to fail.
A more serious service problem with touchscreen systems is failure of the controller electronics due to a
combination of static electricity and improper grounding. The only solution is correction of the grounding
problem followed by replacement of the touchscreen controller.
2.9.1.9 Replaceable Items – There are no replaceable components on the MicroTouch controllers.
Ground
Terminal
Controller
Connector
The MicroTouch touchscreen is the capacitive sensor portion of a system which allows the position of a touch
from a human finger on a computer screen to be sensed, thereby allowing the operator to directly interact with
and control a graphical display. The touchscreen is a piece of molded tempered glass with a conductive material
bonded to its surface. Electrodes around the edge of the screen distribute a voltage field around the glass.
Touching the screen with a finger or other conductive object disturbs the field in such a way that the controller
can determine the position of the touch.
2.9.2.2 Application – The MicroTouch touchscreen is intended for use with 21" Vision color monitors.
2.9.2.3 Interfaces – The MicroTouch touchscreen has one electrical interface (shown in Figure 2-54) which
mates to the touchscreen controller.
2.9.2.4 Removing the Touchscreen – All Sperry Marine products featuring a touchscreen are supplied with
the touchscreen already installed. The following information is supplied for those occasions when a defect with
a monitor or a touchscreen requires the removal or replacement of a touchscreen.
The touchscreen is secured to the front surface of the monitor display tube using two-sided gasket tape. This
touchscreen may be replaced without replacing the complete monitor. Conversely, if it is necessary to replace
the monitor, the touchscreen must be removed from the defective display for installation onto the new monitor.
The touchscreen is made of curved glass to fit the front surface of the monitor tube. Care must be exercised in
removing and replacing the touchscreen to avoid damage resulting from stress induced during removal or
handling.
Do not attempt to simply pull the touchscreen free of the monitor's display tube
(CRT). Carefully remove all gasket material which secures the touchscreen.
1. Disconnect the touchscreen lead from the touchscreen controller board, and disconnect the ground lead
from the monitor chassis. Fold back the cable and secure it to the touchscreen's front surface with tape,
to prevent damage to cable wires while removing and replacing the touchscreen.
2. Use a piece of 18 gauge insulated wire approximately 30 inches (760 mm) in length to separate the touch
screen from the monitor. Carefully insert the wire between the edge of the touch screen and the monitor
surface and split the gasket. Work around the screen from top to bottom and split all gasket material until
the touch screen is free.
3. If either the touchscreen or the monitor are to be retained, remove all gasket material and tape residue
from the assemblies.
2.9.2.5 Installing the Touchscreen – If a new touchscreen is being installed, it is supplied with the two-sided
gasket tape used for installing the replacement assembly. If a removed touchscreen is being remounted, it is
necessary to use the proper width and type gasket tape for installation. Using this tape ensures proper installation
of the touchscreen and prevents the touchscreen from coming loose at a future time. (It also prevents the
touchscreen from becoming impossible to remove at a future time as a result of dried glue, or the gasket being
too thin or too hard to cut free.)
# 12.7 mm (½ inch) wide x 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick double-sided foam tape, Scotch® Brand 3M, Core
Series 2-0300, or equivalent
1. Using the glass cleaner and a soft lint-free cloth, clean the back surface of the touchscreen and the front
surface of the monitor to remove all dust and old tape.
2. Proper installation of the touchscreen requires aligning the touchscreen with the monitor.
3. Remove the monitor bezel by removing the 8 allen bolts securing it to the top console section.
4. Cut 4 strips of double-sided tape (Sperry Marine P/N 1897193-1) ½ the length of each side of the
touchscreen. Place the strips at the center of the sides of the touchscreen as shown in Figure 2-55.
5. Cut four strips of double-sided tape the full length of each side of the touchscreen. Place the strips on
top of the ones installed in step 4.
6. Carefully press the touchscreen onto the surface of the monitor. Be certain the touchscreen is centered
horizontally and vertically .
7. Carefully re-install the bezel. Check for proper closure and sealing of the bezel gasket around the front
surface of the monitor.
CAUTION
Be certain that the touchscreen is not touching any metal surface, and check that
there is approximately 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) clearance between the back surface of
the touchscreen and the front surface of the monitor.
8. Clean the front surface of the touchscreen with the glass cleaner.
9. Connect the touchscreen lead to the touchscreen controller board (mounted on the side of the
monitor). Connect the green ground lead to the monitor chassis using a star washer.
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the
ground terminal provided in the touchscreen to controller cable be firmly
grounded to the monitor chassis using a star washer, and that the monitor,
controller, and cabinet all be grounded to the ship's structure (or earth, in
land-based installations). Both the monitor and touchscreen are powerful
generators of static electrical forces that can destroy the touchscreen
controller if not properly shunted to ground.
2.9.2.6 Common Problems – The most common service problem with touchscreen systems is failure of the
controller electronics due to a combination of static electricity and improper grounding.
Ground
Terminal
Controller
Connector
The MicroTouch touchscreen is the capacitive sensor portion of a system which allows the position of a touch
from a human finger on a computer screen to be sensed, thereby allowing the operator to directly interact with
and control a graphical display. The touchscreen is a piece of molded tempered glass with a conductive material
bonded to its surface. Electrodes around the edge of the screen distribute a voltage field around the glass.
Touching the screen with a finger or other conductive object disturbs the field in such a way that the controller
can determine the position of the touch.
2.9.3.2 Application – The MicroTouch touchscreen is intended for use with 26" Vision color monitors.
2.9.3.3 Interfaces – The MicroTouch touchscreen has one electrical interface (shown in Figure 2-56) which
mates to the touchscreen controller.
2.9.3.4 Replacing the Touchscreen – All Sperry Marine products featuring a touchscreen are supplied with
the touchscreen already installed. The following information is supplied for those occasions when a defect with
a monitor or a touchscreen requires the removal or replacement of a touchscreen.
Removing the Touchscreen – The touchscreen is secured to the front surface of the monitor display tube
using two-sided gasket tape. This touchscreen may be replaced without replacing the complete monitor.
Conversely, if it is necessary to replace the monitor, the touchscreen must be removed from the defective
display for installation onto the new monitor. The touchscreen is made of curved glass to fit the front surface
of the monitor tube. Care must be exercised in removing and replacing the touchscreen to avoid damage
resulting from stress induced during removal or handling.
Do not attempt to simply pull the touchscreen free of the monitor's display tube
(CRT). Carefully remove all gasket material which secures the touchscreen.
1. Disconnect the touchscreen lead from the touchscreen controller board, and disconnect the ground lead
from the monitor chassis. Fold back the cable and secure it to the touchscreen's front surface with tape,
to prevent damage to cable wires while removing and replacing the touchscreen.
2. Use a piece of 18 gauge insulated wire approximately 30 inches (760 mm) in length to separate the touch
screen from the monitor. Carefully insert the wire between the edge of the touch screen and the monitor
surface and split the gasket. Work around the screen from top to bottom and split all gasket material until
the touch screen is free.
3. If either the touchscreen or the monitor are to be retained, remove all gasket material and tape residue
from the assemblies.
2.9.3.5 Installing the Touchscreen – If a new touchscreen is being installed, it is supplied with the two-sided
gasket tape used for installing the replacement assembly. If a removed touchscreen is being remounted, it is
necessary to use the proper width and type gasket tape for installation. Using this tape ensures proper installation
of the touchscreen and prevents the touchscreen from coming loose at a future time. (It also prevents the
touchscreen from becoming impossible to remove at a future time as a result of dried glue, or the gasket being
too thin or too hard to cut free.)
# 12.7 mm (½ inch) wide x 3 mm (1/8 inch) thick double-sided foam tape, Scotch® Brand 3M, Core
Series 2-0300, or equivalent
1. Using the glass cleaner and a soft lint-free cloth, clean the back surface of the touchscreen and the front
surface of the monitor to remove all dust and old tape.
2. Proper installation of the touchscreen requires aligning the touchscreen with the monitor.
3. Remove the monitor bezel by removing the 8 allen bolts securing it to the top console section.
4. Cut 4 strips of double-sided tape (Sperry Marine P/N 1897193-1) ½ the length of each side of the
touchscreen. Place the strips at the center of the sides of the touchscreen as shown in Figure 2-57.
5. Cut four strips of double-sided tape the full length of each side of the touchscreen. Place the strips on
top of the ones installed in step 4.
6. Carefully press the touchscreen onto the surface of the monitor. Be certain the touchscreen is centered
horizontally and vertically .
7. Carefully re-install the bezel. Check for proper closure and sealing of the bezel gasket around the front
surface of the monitor.
CAUTION
Be certain that the touchscreen is not touching any metal surface, and check that
there is approximately 1.5 mm (1/16 inch) clearance between the back surface of
the touchscreen and the front surface of the monitor.
8. Clean the front surface of the touchscreen with the glass cleaner.
9. Connect the touchscreen lead to the touchscreen controller board (mounted on the side of the monitor).
Connect the green ground lead to the monitor chassis using a star washer.
Before power is ever applied to the system, it is very important that the ground
terminal provided in the touchscreen to controller cable be firmly grounded to
the monitor chassis using a star washer, and that the monitor, controller, and
cabinet all be grounded to the ship's structure (or earth, in land-based
installations). Both the monitor and touchscreen are powerful generators of
static electrical forces that can destroy the touchscreen controller if not properly
shunted to ground.
2.9.3.6 Common Problems – The most common service problem with touchscreen systems is failure of the
controller electronics due to a combination of static electricity and improper grounding.
The keyboard cable adapter is shown in Figure 2-58. The adapter is required to connect a standard IBM-AT type
keyboard to the Pentium computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1820488.
2.10.1.2 Application – Reference Figure 2-58. The standard keyboard connects to the 5 DIN end. The 6
DIN mini connector goes to the computer.
Key Tronic
P. O. Box 14687
Spokaine, WA 99214-0687
1-800-262-6006
The vendor's part number is KB101-C.
2.10.2.2 Application – The KB101 keyboard is supplied with all VMS equipment having an operator
interface: namely, the Command Station and the Navigation Workstation.
2.10.2.3 Interfaces – The keyboard’s only interface is the industry-standard 5-pin DIN plug, shown in
Figure 2-60.
2.10.2.4 Configuration – The keyboard is configured to operate in the Enhanced XT, AT & PS/2 mode.
DIP switch settings determine the configuration and options for the keyboard. The possible settings are as
follows:
Switch Parameter
2.10.2.6 Software Support – Support for keyboard operation is provided as standard features of the BIOS.
CAUTION
1. Reference Figure 2-61. Locate the configuration switch on the bottom of the keyboard. Remove the
cover.
2. Reference Figure 2-62. Configure the keyboard for Enhanced XT/AT & PS/2.
As long as all necessary bridge integration and automation functions can be accomplished by a single computer
and display system, and if the number of sensor and equipment interfaces is not too large, there may be no
requirement for a network. If two or more computers are needed, however, the situation changes drastically, with
the number of interconnections required quickly becoming unmanageable. SeaNET is a Local Area Network
(LAN) that Sperry Marine developed to solve the interconnection problem.
SeaNET is a central integrating element of Sperry Marine's Integrated Bridge systems. SeaNET is an application
of the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet Standard providing real-time sensor data distribution and file transfer. The Ethernet
architecture and Sperry's real-time interface provide a distributed network that can guarantee access to the
network for all devices, with an end-to-end message delay less than a tenth of a second.
SeaNET provides two basic services that make it a very valuable tool for accomplishing the integration of bridge
equipment:
SeaNET's message distribution service makes the data from any sensor connected to SeaNET almost instantly
available to every other device on the network. The Peripheral and Interface Specifications chapter of this
document describes these messages in detail. The VMS Command Station monitors all information on SeaNET.
In addition, the VMS Command Station directs most of the system commands to the other Integrated Bridge
components.
SeaNET also provides a distributed file transfer capability that requires no file server. Files can be transferred
from any network node to any other node at speeds comparable to the speeds that files can be written to a hard
disk. (Any device with a direct network interface is referred to as a network node). The file transfer facility is
valuable for moving chart, NAVLINE, and voyage plan files from the Planning Station where they are usually
created to the VMS Command Station, where they are most often used when under way.
SeaNET adheres to the ISO 8802/3 (IEEE 802.3) Ethernet LAN Standard.
2.11.1.1 Protocol – Ethernet uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD).
In this method, multiple workstations access a transmission medium (Multiple Access) by listening until no
signals are detected (Carrier Sense). Then the workstations transmit and check to see if more than one signal is
present (Collision Detection). Each station attempts to transmit when it “believes” the network is free. If there
is a collision, each station attempts to re-transmit after a preset delay. This delay is different for each workstation.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
Cable Assembly –
NOTE:
1. The total cable length between the first and last station cannot exceed 185 meters.
2. The minimum distance between two stations is 0.5 meters.
3. A 50 ohm BNC terminator must be placed at each extreme end of the cable. One of the
terminators must be grounded at the computer chassis.
Reference Figure 2-64 for cable assembly instructions. The components for building the cables are part of the
SeaNET Bridge Installation Kit, Sperry Marine P/N 1981085. Those components are as follows:
NOTE:
IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE BE
PERFORMED BEFORE CONNECTING ANY CABLE SEGMENTS.
c. Check the outer case of the BNC connectors at each end of the cable for continuity.
d. Install 50 ohm terminator at one end of the cable and check the opposite end of the cable. The BNC
connector at the other end of the cable should measure 50 ohms between the outer case and the
center conductor.
e. Remove the terminator and repeat step 2d with the second terminator. Note that only two terminators
are required for the installation. One of the terminators must be modified by adding a ground strap
(step 5 in Figure 2-64).
Station Connections – The details of connecting the stations are shown in Figure 2-63. The item numbers
shown on the drawing are listed in table 2-26.
2.11.1.3 Software Installation – The SeaNET software installation is part of the Windows NT installation.
The AE-200LC complies with IEEE-802.3 10Base2 and 10BaseT Ethernet standard. The card is also compatible
with IBM PC 386 (and higher) systems. There is an interface for BNC and RJ-45 connectors.
2.11.2.2 Application – The Ethernet Adapter board connects the station PCS on the SeaNET LAN.
2.11.2.3 Interfaces – The Adtron Ethernet Adapter board is located in slot 5 on the motherboard. Refer to
chapter 2.2 to locate slot 5.
PC Bus Interface – The card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
2.11.2.4 Configuration – Figure 2-65 shows jumper settings for the VMS-VT. Table 2-27 shows the
configuration settings for the VMS-VT.
PC Mode Mode 0
2.11.2.5 Hardware Installation – Installing the Adtron Ethernet Adapter Card consists of following:
4. Reference section 2.11.1.2 of this manual for instruction regarding SeaNET Installation.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
2.11.2.7 Common Problems – Most problems encountered with the SeaNET interface are traced to (1)
wiring problems, (2) adapter card mis-configuration, and (3) software installation problems.
LED Indicators – Figure 2-66 shows two LED indicators on the Ethernet card. These LEDs indicate the
presence of station link and activity status for installation and diagnostic purposes.
The red activity LED blinks when data is transmitted or received. The green link LED is associated with the
RJ-45 phone jack and therefore has no useful function in the VMS-VT at this time.
Many of the VMS equipment's "standard" peripherals and direct-connected sensors employ serial interfaces. A
serial interface allows one device to communicate to another (or two devices to communicate to each other) via
a serial stream of digital bits representing messages. The interface is digital rather than analog because the
voltages on the signal lines only represent binary "1"s and "0"s. The interface is serial as opposed to parallel
because the bits are transmitted one after another over a single wire (or wire pair) rather than byte-wise over
multiple wires.
There are a very large number of varieties of serial interfaces employed in communications. A smaller but still
large number of variations will be encountered with bridge equipment interconnection. Some of the areas which
vary are:
# the physical connecting means: cables and connectors;
# the electrical signaling method: the voltage or current levels that correspond to "1"s and "0"s;
# the logical protocol used: the definition of sequences of bits for representing higher-order data entities –
characters, bytes, words, messages, etc.
The following sections describe some of the terms and concepts important for understanding the variety of serial
interfaces encountered on the VMS workstations.
+12V
SPACE
+5V
+3V B B
0V
–3V MARK SPACE
Maximum Signaling Rate and Cable Length Max. Signaling Rate Based on Cable Length
2.12.1.2 Data Transmission Formats (Not Specified by EIA Standards) – There are two major
categories of data transmission formats commonly use for communications: synchronous and asynchronous.
Synchronous communications adds special synchronization characters to the data stream so as to make the
greatest possible use of the available bandwidth. Synchronous protocols have not been used by any equipment
integrated thus far by Sperry Marine.
MARK
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 PAR.
SPACE
Figure 2-69: Typical Asynchronous Bit Sequence (8 Data Bits, 1 Stop Bit, Plus Parity Shown)
Asynchronous communications protocols prefix a START bit and append one or more STOP bits and
(optionally) a PARITY bit to every character (or byte) transmitted. Figure 2-69 shows a typical bit sequence used
in asynchronous transmission.
2.12.1.3 Data Representation – The data transmitted by serial means may be either straight binary data
(understandable only by other computers) or text data (representing written language used by humans). Text data
may be represented as EBCDIC (Enhanced Binary-Coded-Decimal Information Code, an IBM standard) or ASCII
(American National Code for Information Interchange). Most serial interfaces on IBS use ASCII, a few use
binary data or binary-coded decimal (BCD), and none use EBCDIC.
2.12.1.4 IBM PC Serial Port Conventions – Almost every IBM Personal Computer or compatible is
furnished with a least one RS-232 serial port. IBM developed hardware conventions (supported by the BIOS and
DOS) for I/O address and interrupt line usage which supports up to four serial ports per PC, known as devices
COM1, COM2, COM3, and COM4.
All Sperry Marine VMS-VT computers have two serial ports, COM 1 & COM2 as standard. These are RS-232
ports with COM1 at 3F8HEX /IRQ4 and COM2 at 2F8HEX /IRQ3.
Two different connector conventions are common with RS-232 serial PC interfaces. One is based on the 25-pin
male D-connector used for the standard serial port on the original IBM PC and PC/XT. The second uses a 9-pin
male D-connector that first appeared on the IBM PC/AT. The pin assignments of these two conventions are
listed in Table 2-28.
2) Meters –
a) use to check cable continuity (probably 90% of serial interface problems are traced to cabling);
b) use to detect presence/absence of signals.
3) Signal indicators – use bi-color LEDs to indicate the status of data and handshaking signal lines.
4) Scopes –
5) Break-out boxes –
6) Data analyzers –
a) allow viewing and/or storage of actual data streams (sequences of bits, characters, bytes);
b) allow trial use of various baud rates, number of data bits, stop bits, parity bits.
7) A PC equipped with the appropriate hardware (a COM port with the appropriate electrical interface) and
software (a terminal-emulation or communications package – Procomm, for instance) can function as
a data analyzer.
The RocketPort 16 multi-port serial controller provides intelligent control of 16 RS-232 or RS-422 ports. The
hardware consist of an ISA-compatible controller board (1812576-3) and the connector interface block
(1812576-6).
2.12.2.1 Manufacturer –
Comtrol Corp.
2675 Patton Road, Dock D.
Saint Paul, MN 55113.
USA.
Phone 800-926-6876.
2.12.2.2 Application – The RocketPort provides 16 serial interfaces for the Vision computers.
2.12.2.3 Interfaces –
PC Bus Interface – The controller card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
Host Connection – The RocketPort cable male end connects to the controller (Figure 2-70). The female end
connects to the connector interface block (Figure 2-71).
Serial Port Connectors – Refer to Figure 2-71. The 16 serial ports are identified as channels 0-15. The
signal pin-outs are as shown in the following table.
RocketPort Controller Card – The VMS uses one RocketPort controller configured for the default address
range of 180-1C3 hex. The default switch setting is shown in Figure 2-72.
Connector Interface Block – The 16 serial ports connect to the connectors marked 0 - 15. The switch for
each connector is set for RS-232.
Hardware Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
3. Install the RocketPort controller card into an expansion slot. Make sure the card is properly seated.
6. Attach the male end of the RocketPort cable to the controller. Install the female end to the connector
labeled “Host” on the Connector Interface Box.
NOTE:
Chapter 3 of this manual provides a complete overview of the software installation for
the VMS-VT
1. At the DOS prompt, insert the ROCKET DIAGNOSTIC DISK into Drive A: and enter "rocket".
2. Follow the prompts to test the hardware by pressing "Enter" twice.
4. Specify the Base Address of 180-1C3 by selecting "C" and press "Enter".
IRQ is 5
Enter "Y" and verify a "Board Passed Message" appears. Then press "Enter" to continue.
8. Insert the LOOPBACK PLUG into PORT 0 of the External Module Block and press "Enter". Verify
the Port 0 test passed and move the Loopback Plug into the remaining ports sequentially starting with
PORT 1 and finishing with PORT 15. Finally enter "N" to exit the test program.
9. Restart the computer and start Windows NT. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select
the CONTROL PANEL window. Select the NETWORK icon.
10. Select ADD ADAPTER. Under the NETWORK ADAPTER CARD, select <OTHER> REQUIRES
DISK FROM MANUFACTURER. Then press CONTINUE.
11. Insert the ROCKETPORT DEVICE DRIVER FOR WINDOWS NT diskette into drive A: and select
"OK". Then select "OK" again to install the driver.
12. Under the I/O ADDRESS RANGES select ROCKETPORT 1 address 180-1C3. Under the IRQ
NUMBER select IRQ5. Under the STARTING COM PORT select COM3. Then select OK TO
INSTALL. Select "OK" twice to continue.
2.12.2.7 RocketPort Software Utilities – RocketPort provides several utilities to assist in maintaining the
system. Installing the RocketPort driver provides a program group in Windows NT. This is where the utilities
are accessed.
Changing Device Driver Settings – If you want to change the device I/O address, IRQ or the starting COM
number, use the following procedure:
1. Double-click on the RocketPort Driver Configuration icon in the RocketPort program group.
2. Make any necessary changes and select the Update Configuration button.
NOTE:
If you change the I/O Address, make sure that you shut down the PC, remove the
controller and change the DIP switch settings to match the new selection.
1. Double-click on the RocketPort COM Setting icon in the RocketPort program group.
4. Click on the Get Current Settings button. The current settings for the port displays in the selection
boxes.
Changing The Default Settings for Boot-Up – Use the following procedure to permanently change the
COM port default settings.
Changing The Default Settings – Use the following procedure to change the COM port settings.
NOTE:
The settings configured by the RocketPort COM Settings program take affect
immediately. However, when the system is re-booted, the settings revert to the default
parameters.
1. Double-click on the RocketPort COM Setting program in the RocketPort program group.
4. Make the desired selection for each of the parameters and click on the Apply New Settings button to
program these selections for the COM port.
5. After your finish, click on the Quit button and select Exit from the menu bar.
NOTE:
If you are upgrading from Version 1.0 or 1.1 of the device driver, remove the old driver
by double-clicking on the RocketPort Driver Removal icon in the RocketPort program
group.
2. Double-click on the Network icon in the Control Panel to start up the network applet.
3. Select the Comtrol RocketPort entry from the Installed Adapter Cards list (not the Installed Network
Software list) when the Network Settings dialog box appears.
7. Remove the RocketPort icons from the Comtrol RocketPort Group Program Manager.
Resolving Installation Problems – If installation fails or you are trying to resolve a problem, you should
try the following before calling Comtrol technical support.
1. Check the signals between the peripherals and the interface box.
3. Check to see if the DIP switches are properly set by double-clicking on the INSATLL.LOG icon in the
RocketPort group.
5. Make sure that the expansion slot screw was replaced after re-inserting the controller.
6. Re-install the device driver, selecting a different I/O address range for the controller.
2.12.2.8 Common Problems – Whenever two or more PC adapter cards use I/O addresses or hardware
interrupts, the potential for conflict with each other exists. If such a conflict occurs, the symptom is that one or
both adapters will fail to operate, or will function erratically. If such a conflict is suspected, all peripheral
adapters save one may be removed, then re-added one at a time. Note that the Pentium CPU ( Sperry Marine
P/N 1820488) is equipped with on-board serial ports which have a strong potential for conflict with other serial
port adapters.
CAUTION
Use of this serial interface could degrade the computer’s system performance. It is
recommended that any system using this interface be upgraded to the RocketPort 16.
2.12.3.1 Manufacturer –
Comtrol Corp.
2675 Patton Road, Dock D.
Saint Paul, MN 55113.
USA.
Phone 800-926-6876.
2.12.3.2 Application – The RocketPort provides 16 serial interfaces for the Vision computers.
2.12.3.3 Interfaces –
PC Bus Interface – The Host Interface card requires power from the PC bus as follows:
Host Connection – The connector interface block cable mates to the host interface board that’s installed
in the PC.
Serial Port Connectors – Refer to Figure 2-74. The 16 serial ports are identified as channels 1-16.
2.12.3.4 Configuration –
Hostess Interface Board Card – The VMS uses one Hostess controller card configured for address 500
hex. Jumpers must also be set for each port to select RS-232 or RS-422 operation. The switch setting is
shown in Figure 2-73.
Connector Interface Block – The 16 serial ports connect to the connectors marked 1 - 16. There are
jumpers to configure each channel for RS-232 or RS-422 operation. The jumpers are shown in Figure 2-75.
The following table shows how to set the jumpers.
Hardware Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
3) Install the RocketPort controller card into an expansion slot. Make sure the card is properly seated.
6) Attach the cable from the connector interface block to the interface board.
NOTE:
Chapter 3 of this manual provides a complete overview of the software installation for
the VMS-VT
1. Boot the computer with the Hostess Diagnostic Disk inserted in Drive A:. Then start the "hostest"
program.
5. Verify the selections are (550 16 PORT, 500, 5) and press "Y".
6. Verify the Ports are "OK". Then continue the Port test using the Hostess Interface Plug in each port as
directed by the program.
7. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the MS DOS icon.
8. Insert the Comtrol Hostess Windows NT Driver Disk and change to the "A:" prompt. Then enter the
"Setup" command.
9. Verify and enter "A:" is the path containing the Comtrol Configuration Files.
10. Verify "C:\Comtrol" is the path to the destination directory. Then select and enter "OK".
11. Select and enter the "Hostess" icon. Then select and enter "Controller Configuration".
12. Select "Hostess 550" and "Ports". Then set "Starting Comport" to "COM3", "Base I/O Port Address"
to "500", and "Interrupt Request (IRQ) to "5". Select and enter "OK".
1. Remove the Hostess icon by selecting it and using the Program Manager FILE DELETE
sequence.
2. Remove the Hostess window by selecting and using the Program Manager FILE DELETE
sequence.
3. Delete ports 3 - 18 using the Control Panel, Ports, DELETE command.
4. Shutdown Windows NT and disconnect the Hostess cable from the interface card.
5. Re-start Windows NT and repeat steps 8 - 12.
13. Select and enter "Communication Settings". Then select "Communication Port" and change to "COM3".
Select each parameter block and change to the following:
14. Perform step 11 for "COM4 through COM18". Then select and enter "OK". When complete, select and
enter "Exit".
2.12.3.7 Common Problems – Whenever two or more PC adapter cards use I/O addresses or hardware
interrupts, the potential for conflict with each other exists. If such a conflict occurs, the symptom is that one or
both adapters will fail to operate, or will function erratically. If such a conflict is suspected, all peripheral
adapters save one may be removed, then re-added one at a time. Note that the Pentium CPU ( Sperry Marine
P/N 1820488) is equipped with on-board serial ports which have a strong potential for conflict with other serial
port adapters.
The Control Concepts Combination Interface Board contains two serial ports that are used in the VMS. This
board is covered in chapter 2.3 of this manual. The Pentium PC contains two serial ports. Reference chapter 2.2.
The NMEA Splitter/Buffer board expands RS-232/422 signals. There are two input ports. Each input port can
receive an RS-232 or RS-422 signal. The 8 output ports are configurable for a combination of the input signals.
Assembly 1812195-1 operates from a +24 volt supply. Assembly 1812195-2 operates from a +5 volt supply.
2.12.5.2 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-76. Signals are interfaced through terminal blocks TB1-TB3.
Power – Power is connected to either 5 volts from the computer or 24 volts from the ship.
PIN SIGNAL
TB1-9 +5 VDC from PC (1812195-2)
TB1-10 GND from PC (1812195-2)
TB1-11 +24 VDC from ship (1812195-1)
TB1-12 GND from ship (1812195-1)
PIN SIGNAL
TB1-1 Port 1 RS-232 SIG
TB1-2 Port 1 RS-232 RTN
TB1-3 Port 1 RS-422 -
TB1-4 Port 1 RS-422 +
TB1-5 Port 2 RS-422 SIG
TB1-6 Port 2 RS-422 RTN
TB1-7 Port 2 RS-422 -
TB1-8 Port 2 RS-422 +
Output Ports –
PIN SIGNAL
TB3-1 Port 1 RS-232 SIG
TB3-2 Port 1 RS-232 RTN
TB3-3 Port 2 RS-232 SIG
TB3-4 Port 2 RS-232 RTN
TB3-5 Port 3 RS-232 SIG
TB3-6 Port 3 RS-232 RTN
TB3-7 Port 4 RS-232 SIG
TB3-8 Port 4 RS-232 RTN
TB2-1 Port 5 RS-422 -/RS-232 SIG
TB2-2 Port 5 RS-422 +
TB2-3 Port 5 RTN
TB2-4 Port 6 RS-422 -/RS-232 SIG
TB2-5 Port 6 RS-422 +
TB2-6 Port 6 RTN
TB2-7 Port 7 RS-422 -/RS-232 SIG
TB2-8 Port 7 RS-422 +
TB2-9 Port 7 RTN
TB2-10 Port 8 RS-422 -/RS-232 SIG
TB2-11 Port 8 RS-422 +
TB2-12 Port 8 RS-422 RTN
2.12.5.3 Configuration – The NMEA Splitter/Buffer is configured to receive an RS-232 signal on Port 1
and transfer to all 8 output ports. There are three jumpers to set configuration, E1-E3. Set the jumpers as follows:
Configuration
Configuration
2.12.5.4 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any modules
or cables.
1. Attach a strip of double-sided tape to the mounting (parts list item 3 in the NMEA Splitter Assembly
Installation Kit) to the mounting rail (item number 2). Peel the paper off of one side of the tape and affix
to the flat side of the rail.
2. Slide the mounting feet of the NMEA Splitter Assembly onto the flanges of the mounting rail. The
NMEA Splitter Assembly should be located in the center of the mounting rail.
3. Secure the NMEA Splitter Assembly onto the mounting rail by snapping one of the end stops (item
number 4 in the kit) onto each end of the mounting rail. This prevents the NMEA from sliding off the
rail.
4. Select a mounting location for the completed assembly. Clean and de-grease the surface selected for
mounting.
2.12.5.5 Replaceable Items – All components on the NMEA Splitter/Buffer circuit board are field
replaceable.
This subsystem provides input/output of the ship’s analog signals for processing by the Vision computer. Table
2-32 summarizes the operation of the analog components.
16-channel Analog to Digital Isolator. Use with DAS-4. Houses 16 analog Input/Output (I/O)
modules.
4-channel Analog Kit. Use with DAS-4 and. Houses 4 analog I/O modules.
4-20 mA current input module. Provides single channel current input from ship signals.
±10 V voltage input module. Provides single channel voltage input from ship signals.
4-20 mA current output module. Provides single channel current output to ship signals.
Alarm Relay Interface Kit. This card provides up to 3 isolated relay contact closures
(normally open or closed).
19 37
IRQ LEVEL
2 3 4 5 6 7 X
J2 20
1
The DAS-4 data acquisition card pictured in Figure 2-77 contains an 8 channel 8 bit analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter and digital inputs and outputs (I/O). The following is a list of the major features of the DAS-4:
# 8 channel, 8-bit successive-approximation A/D converter with sample and hold (AD7574);
# A/D inputs are single ended with a common ground, ±5 volts full scale, with a resolution of 0.0391 volts
(39.1 millivolts); can withstand continuous overload of ±30 volts, brief transients of several hundred volts;
# A/D conversion time 20 microseconds typical, 30 µsec maximum;
# +5.0 (±0.2) volt reference output, capable of sourcing/sinking 5 mA;
# 4 digital outputs, 3 digital inputs (TTL levels, +5 VDC nominal);
# PC bus power (+5, +12, -12 VDC) available on the external connector.
MetraByte Corporation.
A Division of Keithley Instruments.
440 Myles Standish Boulevard.
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.
The manufacturer's part number for the board is DAS-4.
2.13.1.2 Interfaces – The DAS-4 plugs directly into one of the expansion slots in the PC. All external
connections for analog inputs and external digital I/O interfaces to the computer are then made via a 37-pin male
D-connector on the card. These interfaces are described below.
External Interface Connector – The DAS-4 provides several different types of electrical interfaces:
# 8 channels of single-ended analog inputs (+5 volt full scale input range)
# 4 digital (TTL) outputs and 3 digital (TTL) inputs
# +5.0 ±0.2 vdc voltage reference for external sensors
# PC bus power (+5, +12, and -12 vdc) for operation of external circuits
1 +12V +12 VDC PC bus power 19 VREF +5.0 VDC (±0.2v) precision
2 (N.C.) reference voltage from A/D
3 (N.C.) converter
4 (N.C.) 20 -12V -12 VDC from PC bus
5 (N.C.) 21 (N.C.)
6 (N.C.) 22 (N.C.)
7 OP1 Digital output 1 23 (N.C.)
8 OP2 Digital output 2 24 INT. IN Interrupt input. Positive edge-
9 OP3 Digital output 3 triggered input
10 OP4 Digital output 4 25 IP1 Digital input 1
11 DIG COM Digital & power common. Return for all 26 IP2 Digital input 2
logic signals and power supply 27 IP3 Digital input 3
currents. Connected to computer 28 DIG. COM Digital & power common (same
chassis. (see pin 28) as pin 11)
29 +5V +5 VDC power from PC bus
12 L.L. COM Low level grounds. These are common 30 IN7 Analog input channel 7
13 L.L. COM returns and shields for the analog 31 IN6 Analog input channel 6
14 L.L. COM input channels. 32 IN5 Analog input channel 5
15 L.L. COM 33 IN4 Analog input channel 4
16 L.L. COM 34 IN3 Analog input channel 3
17 L.L. COM 35 IN2 Analog input channel 2
18 L.L. COM 36 IN1 Analog input channel 1
37 IN0 Analog input channel 0
2.13.1.3 Configuration – There are four configurable items on the DAS-4: the Base Address Select switch
block, the Interrupt Request (IRQ) Level Select jumper, and two A/D trimmer potentiometers (R8 and R10).
These items (shown in Figure 2-77 ) are described in the following paragraphs.
Base Address Switches and IRQ Level Jumper – Reference Figure 2-78. The DAS-4 interfaces to the host
computer via a block of four contiguous I/O addresses and one (optional) interrupt request line. The eight
DIP switches labeled "BASE ADDRESS, 9 .. 2" correspond to address bits A9 .. A2, with the OFF position
of the switch setting the corresponding address bit to "1". This allows the DAS-4 to be placed anywhere in
the lower 1K of I/O address space. Likewise, the "IRQ LEVEL" jumper allows any IRQ level from 2 to 7
to be selected.
A/D Trimmer Potentiometers – In most applications, the A/D does not require adjustment. An adjustment
procedure is described in Chapter 5 of the DAS-4 User's Manual, supplied with the card. This procedure
requires a 4½ digit multi-meter, a noise-free voltage source, a personal computer with monitor, keyboard,
disk drive, DOS and GWBASIC, and a program called CAL.EXE (supplied with the card on a 5¼" floppy
disk).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
1. Reference Figure 2-78. Configure the card’s address according to the following:
2.13.2.1 Manufacturer –
MetraByte Corporation.
A Division of Keithley Instruments.
440 Myles Standish Boulevard.
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.
2.13.2.2 Interfaces –
Analog I/O Modules – Reference Figure 2-79. The modules plug into the 16 slots of the mounting rack.
Each slot contains four terminal screws for connecting ship analog signals (see Table 2-35).
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any modules
or cables.
3. Connect the ship’s analog signals to the field wiring terminals for each module.
4. Connect the ribbon cable to the DAS-4 card in the computer. The computer should be powered off.
5. The computer should be powered up and the DAS-4 card operating before applying power to the Analog
Isolator.
2.13.3.2 Application – The 4-Channel Analog Kit is used to interface ship analog signals using the analog
modules. The kit is designed to be mounted in small places.
2.13.3.3 Interfaces –
Card Installed In The Computer – There are two 37-pin connectors for connection to the DAS-4 or other
converter card. These connectors are wired identically.
Screw Terminal I/O – The 37 signals from the DAS-4 card are brought out to screw terminals for field
wiring. The available signals are shown in Table 2-33.
Power – There are two screw terminals for wiring +5 volts and GND. This power can be supplied from the
converter card. For example, power can be supplied from the DAS-4 card by making the following
connections shown in Figure 2-81.
CAUTION
There is no protection against reverse polarity. Reversing the power supply connections
can destroy any installed modules.
Input Signals To Modules – Reference Figure 2-80. There are four sets of signals for the four modules.
The signals are labeled “HI”, “LO”, “+EXC” and “-EXC”. The signals available depend on the module
type installed (reference chapter 2.13.2). The signal sets for the four modules are labeled CHAN 0 -
CHAN 3.
Output Signals From Modules – There are two output signals available for each module. The signals
are labeled “+” and “-”. The output signal available depends on the module type installed.
2.13.3.4 Configuration –
Differential vs. Single-Ended Inputs – There are four switches to allow each module to be set for
differential or single-ended inputs.
2.13.3.5 Installation –
There are three analog I/O modules as shown in Table 2-36. These modules are used in the 16-Channel
Analog Isolator, the 4-Channel Analog Kit and the Kamewa Interface Kit.
2.13.4.1 Manufacturer –
MetraByte Corporation.
A Division of Keithley Instruments.
440 Myles Standish Boulevard.
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.
Power Consumption 150 mW (30 mA) 150 mW (30 mA) 850 mW (170 mA)
2.13.5.1 Manufacturer –
MetraByte Corporation.
A Division of Keithley Instruments.
440 Myles Standish Boulevard.
Taunton, MA 02780.
USA.
Phone (508) 880-3000.
The vendor’s part number is DAS-1602.
2.13.5.2 Specifications –
Analog Inputs –
Channels: 2.
Voltage Range: 0 to 5V, 0 to 10 V, ±5 V, ±10 V.
Output Current: ±5 mA max.
Linearity: ±½ bit.
Resolution: 12 bits.
Output Impedance: + 0.1 S.
Digital Inputs –
Bits: 4.
Voltage Low: 0.8 V max.
Voltage High: 2.0 V min.
Low Current: -0.2 mA max.
High Current: 20 µA max.
Digital Outputs –
Bits: 4.
Voltage Low: 0.5 V max. @ Isink = 0.8 mA.
Voltage High: 2.4 V min @ Isource = 0.4 mA.
2.13.5.3 Interfaces – The signals on the edge connector J1 are the ones primarily used in the Vision
System. The following table shows the signal pin-outs.
3 OP 3 22 OP 2
4 OP 1 23 OP 0
5 IP 3 24 IP 2/CTR 0 GATE
11 CH 7 LO IN/CH 15 HI IN 30 CH 7 HI IN
12 CH 6 LO IN/CH 14 HI IN 31 CH 6 HI IN
13 CH 5 LO IN/CH 13 HI IN 32 CH 5 HI IN
14 CH 4 LO IN/CH 12 HI IN 33 CH 4 HI IN
15 CH 3 LO IN/CH 11 HI IN 34 CH 3 HI IN
16 CH 2 LO IN/CH 10 HI IN 35 CH 2 HI IN
17 CH 1 LO IN/CH 9 HI IN 36 CH 1 HI IN
18 CH 0 LO IN/CH 8 HI IN 37 CH 0 HI IN
19 LL GND
2.13.5.4 Configuration – Figure 2-83 shows the default configuration settings. Switch S6 controls the
base address. As shown, address bits 9 - 4 can be set. Address bits 3 - 0 are internally set to zero. The figure
shows the settings for address 300 hex.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
4. Connect the 37-pin cable to J1. Connect the other end of the cable to the subsystem controlled by the
DAS-1602.
2.13.5.6 Software Installation – The DAS-1602 card must be included in the CONFIG.INI file.
Reference Appendix A of this Manual, Configuring VMS-VT. The information is in the section entitled
[SPEED_CONTOL_LDHx].
2.13.6.3 Configuration –
1. The four DIP switches on the STA-MB board (CH0-CH3) must be set to “SE”.
2. Peel the protective backing from one side of the Velcro mounting pad. Press a 1" by 1" pad
firmly into place for each corner of the box. Surfaces should be above 20o C.
3. Locate the STA-MB box at designated location. Degrease the area under the pads.
4. When dry, peel the protective backing from all pads and carefully press the box into place. Allow
48 hours for maximum bond strength to develop.
1. Attach the alarm panel to the rail that is included in the kit.
2. Degrease the bottom of the rail. Once dry, attach one side of the double-sided tape included in
the kit.
3. Locate alarm panel & rail at designated location. Degrease area & allow to dry.
4. Peel the bottom of the double sided tape and carefully press the alarm into place.
Electrical Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any modules
or cables.
1. Mount the three MB32-01 modules onto the STA-MB. They go in sockets CHAN 0 to CHAN.
2.
3. Complete the wiring as shown in Figures 2-84 and 2-85. The 37-conductor ribbon cable
connects to J1 of the DAS-1602 board.
2.13.6.5 Software Installation – The DAS-1602 card must be included in the CONFIG.INI file.
Reference Appendix A of this Manual, Configuring VMS-VT. The information is in the section entitled
[SPEED_CONTOL_LDHx].
Regulations for bridges allowing reduced manning require that all navigation equipment on such bridges have
three special alarm outputs:
(1) an operator fitness alarm, also known as a "dead-man alarm", intended to detect absence of operator
activity;
(2) a system failure alarm to provide notice of an self-diagnosed equipment faults; and
(3) an operator warning alarm, signaling any operational warnings detected by the equipment, or the
need for operator intervention.
To support such a system, the VMS Command Station can be interfaced to an external alarm system through
the optional Alarm Relay Assembly, shown in Figure 2-87. The modem control lines of two of the Command
ALARMRLY.WPG
Snap-in Wago Double-
TS-35
Terminal Block backed
Mounting Rail Tape
Figure 2-87: The Alarm Relay Interface Option for the VMS Command Station
Station's serial ports serve as relay control signals. Use of modem control lines for this purpose does not
affect the use of the data lines (RxD, TxD) of those ports for communications.
The Alarm Relay Assembly can also be used to provide a relay contact output that is activated whenever the
VMS Command Station's or Navigation Workstation's audible alarm ("beeper") is sounded. (Functionally,
the audible alarm is activated when either the system failure or operator warning alarm is activated).
The relays on the board are Aromat DS2D-S-DC5V, or equivalent, which are single-side stable relays with
two Form "C" contacts; only one set of contacts from each relay is brought out to terminals. Other important
specifications of these relays is given below (ratings are per relay):
2.13.7.2 Application – This option is usually only employed in ships designed to meet the Det Norske
Veritas's "Rules for One-Man Bridge Operation in Ocean Areas and Coastal Waters," informally known as
"Watch-1".
K1
J1 Q1
R1
D6 J3 (OUT1)
IN1 1
D1 3 NO(Normally Open)
GND 2 1 NC(Normally Closed)
2 C (Common)
+5V 3
K2
J2 Q2
R2 D5
IN2 1 J4 (OUT2)
D2 3 NO(Normally Open)
GND 2 1 NC(Normally Closed)
2 C (Common)
IN3 3 K3
R3 Q3
D4 J5 (OUT3)
D3 3 NO(Normally Open)
1 NC(Normally Closed)
Notes:
2 C (Common)
1. All diodes: 1N4004 ALARMCKT.WPG
2. All resistors: 4.7KS,¼W
3. All transistors: 2N2222A 4. All relays: Aromat DS2-M-DC5, or equivalent
2.13.7.3 Interfaces – All electrical connections to the Alarm Relay are made via removable 3-pin Wago
connectors. The location of these connectors is shown in Figure 2-87, while their function is shown in Figure
2-88. The board also requires +5 VDC power; this is generally supplied in the Command Station cabinet
from terminal strip TB1 on the Power Termination Board. Typical wiring for the Alarm Relay Assembly is
shown and described below.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing the Relay Assembly.
A
TxD 2
RxD 3 These lines
RTS 4 available
CTS 5 for other
DSR 6 interfaces
Sig Gnd 7
DTR 20
A
Pwr Gnd 1
TxD 2 These lines
RxD 3 available
RTS 4
for other
CTS 5
DSR 6 interfaces
Sig Gnd 7
ALARMCK3.WPG
DTR 20
Figure 2-89: Typical Wiring of the Alarm Relay Assembly for Watch-1 Alarms
Wiring for Watch-1 Alarms – The typical wiring of relay control signals from the Command Station's
Star Gate 8-line Interface ports to the board for control of the Operator Fitness, System Failure, and
Operator Warning alarms is shown in Figure 2-89.
Stargate 8-line Port
P1
A
Pwr Gnd 1
TxD 2 These lines
RxD 3
RTS 4 available
CTS 5 for other
DSR 6 interfaces
Sig Gnd 7
DTR 20
TB1 1 IN1 NC 1
(Located in 2 AUDIBLE
3 2 GND C
VMS Command ALARM RELAY
Station Cabinet) 5 3 +5V NO 3
J1 J3
1 IN2 NC 1
2 GND C 2
3 IN3 NO 3
J2 J4
NC 1
ALARM RELAY
C 2
ASSEMBLY NO 3
J5
ALARMCK4.WPG
Figure 2-90: Typical Wiring of the Alarm Relay Assembly for Control of an Audible Alarm
Wiring for the Audible Alarm – The typical wiring of relay control signals from the Command
Station's Star Gate 8-line Interface ports to the board for control of an external Audible Alarm is shown
in Figure 2-90.
NOTE:
The Alarm Relay Assembly is not commonly used for this purpose, but it can be.
2.13.7.4 Configuration – The VMS software can be configured via the ">ALARM_PORTS" section
of DEVICES.DAT to use the DTR or RTS modem control lines of its serial ports as relay control signals.
The relevant section is reproduced in Table 2-40, set up to match the wiring shown in Figure 2-89 and Figure
2-90.
2.13.7.5 Replaceable Items – There are no replaceable items on the Alarm Relay Assembly.
2.13.7.6 Software Support – The Sperry Marine applications programs for the VMS Command Station
and the Navigation Workstation both support the Alarm Relay Assembly. There are no special drivers
programs or files required for proper operation.
2.14.1 Single Channel 16-Bit Synchro Card Assembly, Sperry Marine P/N 1812405
2.14.1.1 Manufacturer –
2.14.1.2 Application – The Synchro card interfaces synchro displacement transducers to an IBM PC bus.
These transducers are commonly found on Sperry Marine (and competitor’s) gyroscopes and rudder angle
transmitters.
Electrical –
Synchro Interface – The synchro channels are connected using the interface cable P/N T968784. The cable
connects to edge connector of the Synchro card. The signal pin-outs are as shown in the following figure.
NOTE:
Earlier versions of the Synchro card used a 50-pin connector, therefore the signal pin-out
was different than what is shown in Figure 2-92.
2.14.1.4 Configuration – There are four jumpers to be configured on the card. The jumper settings for the
VMS-VT are as shown in Figure 2-91. The complete options for the jumpers are shown in the following table.
2.14.1.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
Hardware Installation –
3. Remove the computer cover. Install the Synchro card into the computer.
Replaceable Items – There are no field replaceable components on the Synchro card.
2.14.2.1 Manufacturer –
2.14.2.2 Application – The Synchro card interfaces synchro displacement transducers to an IBM PC bus.
These transducers are commonly found on Sperry Marine (and competitor’s) gyroscopes and rudder angle
transmitters.
Electrical –
Synchro Interface – The synchro channels are connected using the interface cable P/N T968784. The cable
connects to edge connector of the Synchro card. The signal pin-outs are as shown in the following figure.
NOTE:
Earlier versions of the Synchro card used a 50-pin connector, therefore the signal pin-out
was different than what is shown in Figure 2-94.
2.14.2.4 Configuration – There are four jumpers to be configured on the card. The jumper settings for the
VMS-VT are as shown in Figure 2-93. The complete options for the jumpers are shown in the following table.
2.14.2.5 Installation –
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
Hardware Installation –
3. Remove the computer cover. Install the Synchro card into the computer.
Replaceable Items – There are no field replaceable components on the Synchro card.
Figures 2-95 and 2-96 show the location of the COM ports.
2.15.2.1 Manufacturer –
Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, Washington 98052-6399
The vendor’s part number is 37964.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards or
cables.
Microsoft Corporation
One Microsoft Way
Redmond, Washington 98052-6399.
CAUTION
Remove all power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards
or cables
2.15.4.1 Manufacturer –
CAUTION
Remove all power from all involved equipment before installing or removing any cards
or cables
3. Connect the cable from the digitizer tablet to the controller box.
2. Place the CUSTOM CONFIGURATION MENU CARD within the active area of the digitizer tablet.
Secure the card from moving during the installation process.
3. Using the DIGITIZER MOUSE, select the "P" located on the SUPERSET MENU (notice the proximity
light will flash slowly).
4. Select ALIGNMENT POINT 1 (small blue square) on the lower left corner of the CUSTOM
CONFIGURATION CARD (notice the proximity light will flash rapidly). Then select ALIGNMENT
POINT 2 on the lower right corner of the CUSTOM CONFIGURATION CARD.
Notice: If three beeps are heard and three flashes on the proximity light are seen, an invalid
alignment point was entered or the CUSTOM CONFIGURATION CARD is not located
entirely within the active area of the digitizer tablet.
5. Using the DIGITIZER MOUSE, select the following configuration parameters on the CUSTOM
CONFIGURATION CARD:
BAUD: 4800
DATA BITS: 8
STOP BITS: 1
PARITY: NONE
GTCO: ASCII
BUTTON: INCLUDE
SPACE: INCLUDE
CALCOMP: N/A
6. Save the configuration by selecting "P" on the SUPERSET MENU (notice four beeps and four flashes
on the proximity light indicating a successfully saved configuration).
2.16.1.1 Manufacturer –
2.16.1.2 Interfaces –
1. Remove the packing tape securing the left side of the top cover, securing both sides of the OUT tray
packing material and the packing tape securing the paper length adjuster to the printer.
3. Open the top cover and remove the tape securing the packing material inside the printer.
CAUTION
Remove power from all involved equipment before installing or removing the printer.
1. Install the power cable to the power module as shown in Figure 2-100.
2. Install the power cable to the power module as shown in Figure 2-101.
NOTE:
This chapter covers procedures that must be performed the first time the printer is used.
Initial Procedure –
1. Turn on the computer, then turn on the printer by pressing and releasing the power button. The very
first time you turn on the printer, the printer performs a start-up procedure.
2. Open the top cover of the printer. In a few moments the empty print cartridge cradle automatically
moves to the center of the printer and the resume light flashes.
NOTE:
If the resume light continues to blink and if the cradle does not move back to the right side
of the printer, remove and re-install the print cartridge. Make sure the print cartridge is
pressed down into the cradle before your snap it forward into position. Also, be sure the
cartridge guide is behind the black print cartridge.
3. Install either the black print cartridge or the color print cartridge as detailed in the following
procedures.
1. Open the packaging for the black print cartridge. Grasp the print cartridge by the top and remove
the packaging. Be careful no to touch the ink nozzles or the copper contacts.
2. Remove both pieces of tape covering the ink nozzles and the vent hole on the black print cartridge.
3. Reference Figure 2-102. Drop the print cartridge into the cradle, making sure that the print cartridge
is in front of the movable cartridge guide. Align the arrow on the cartridge top with the dot on top
of the cradle.
4. Push the arrow toward the dot until the cartridge snaps into place (rocking of the cradle is normal).
Be sure that the movable cartridge guide is behind the black print cartridge.
2.16.1.7 Replaceable Items – The ink cartridge is replaceable. To replace the cartridge use the following
procedure.
1. With the printer turned on, open the top cover. In a few minutes, the print cartridge cradle automatically
moves to the center of the printer and the resume light flashes.
2. Reference Figure 2-103. Grasp the top of the print cartridge and pull it toward you until the cartridge
pops loose.
2.17.1 1.4 KVA Vision Power Distribution System, Sperry Marine P/N 1812418
(6.5")
(12.50")
(12.00")
Top View
Output
TAP
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
(9.12") PA3
PA2
PA1
AC INPUT Input
PA0 L N G
Oneac Power Conditioner (shown in Figure 2-104) is used to protect electronic systems from problems caused
by power line noise and transients. The unit has a power rating of 1440 VA at an operating frequency of 50/60
Hz. The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output voltage of 120 VAC. This
power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine for an input of 240 VAC as a safety precaution. The unit
weights 18.6 Kg (41 Lbs.).
ONEAC Corporation
27944 N. Bradley Road
Libertyville, IL. 60048
1-800-243-4543
The vendor’s part number is FT1115.
2.17.1.3 Interfaces – The power conditioner has two terminal blocks, one for AC input voltage and one for
AC output voltage.
AC Input – The Input terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-105 , has three terminals labeled "L" (Line or
"hot" or AC high), "N" (neutral or AC low) and "G" (chassis ground).
Jumper Configuration For Input
Of 240 VAC Vendor Information
TAP
PB3
PB2
Voltage Tap PB1
PB0
Selection Jumpers PA3
PA2
AC INPUT AC OUTPUT
PA1
PA0 L N G L N G
Vendor
Information
AC Output – The Output terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-105, has three terminals labeled "L" (line),
"N" (neutral) and "G" (chassis ground).
2.17.1.4 Configuration – The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output
voltage of 120 VAC, as shown in Table 2-44.
Note1 These voltages use only TWO wires. Connect both ends of the extra wire to PA0 to avoid losing it.
Note2 The power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine jumpered for 240 voltage input as a safety
precaution.
2.17.1.5 Installation Procedure – The power conditioner must be installed using the IBS installation
drawings provided and the following instructions. A typical IBS power distribution installation wiring schematic
is shown in Figure 2-106.
AC High
AC Low
IBS
Equipment
Circuit Breakers
Oneac Power
Conditioner
1. Determine from the installation drawing whether the output neutral (N) should be isolated from the
power conditioner chassis ground. The power conditioner is shipped with the output neutral (N)
connected to the chassis ground.
2. If the output neutral (N) and chassis ground are connected for the installation, all electronic equipment
to be protected by the Oneac power conditioner must be grounded to the Oneac only. Do not connect
any other grounds to the protected equipment.
3. If the output neutral (N) is to be disconnected from the chassis ground, unscrew the eight (8) screws from
the cover and remove the cover. Inside the power conditioner on the output end, remove the one (1)
green wire with a red stripe as shown in Figure 2-107 and 2-108. The green wire with a red stripe
connects the filter printed circuit board to the chassis ground stud. Replace cover.
WARNING!
If the chassis ground is removed from the power conditioner, all units receiving power
from the power conditioner must be individually grounded with chassis grounds.
Check each unit for proper voltage tap selection per Table 2-44. A voltage tap change
may be required before installation. Insure that the combined power requirements of
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 1440 VA.
Transformer
Filter Printed Circuit Board
Voltage Tap
Selection
Terminal Block
Output Terminal
Block
4. The actual physical placement of the power conditioner should be as close as possible to the electronics
within the equipment enclosure.
5. The physical placement should also take into consideration that the power conditioner power input wiring
will follow the branch service circuit breakers (or disconnects and fuses).
6. Once the location for the power conditioner has been determined, the power conditioner should be bolted
firmly on a sturdy panel or structure.
WARNING!
There is no over current protection provided on these units. It is highly recommended that a
circuit breaker, or similar protection device, be installed preceding the power conditioner.
7. Check to see that the main power source and your electronic equipment are turned OFF.
8. Connect the power wiring from the power source line to the input terminals on the power conditioner.
NOTE:
Only jumper wires are to be connected to the voltage tap terminal block. Connect input
wires to the input terminal block only.
WARNING!
11. Use a voltmeter to measure voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) input terminals. If the voltage
reading is correct, the primary coils of the power conditioner are operational.
12. If there is no voltage reading, turn the main power source OFF. Disconnect the power conditioner and
contact the nearest Oneac Service Representative.
13. Measure the output voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) terminals. The output voltage readings
should be 120 VAC. If the reading is not correct, turn the main power source OFF and recheck the
voltage tap jumpers.
14. Connect the electronic equipment to the power conditioner output terminal block terminals.
15. Turn the main power source and the electronic equipment ON.
16. Verify that the proper voltage is present at the output terminals of the power conditioner.
(7.5")
(12.50")
(12.00")
Top View
Output
TAP
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
(9.12") PA3
PA2
PA1
AC INPUT Input
PA0 L N G
Oneac Power Conditioner (shown in Figure 2-109) is used to protect electronic systems from problems caused
by power line noise and transients. The unit has a power rating of 2880 VA at an operating frequency of 50/60
Hz. The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output voltage of 120/240 VAC,
split phase. This power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine for an input of 240 VAC as a safety
precaution. The unit weights 41.7 Kg (92 Lbs.).
ONEAC Corporation
27944 N. Bradley Road
Libertyville, IL. 60048
800-243-4543
The vendor part number is FT1328/2328.
2.17.2.3 Interfaces – The power conditioner has two terminal blocks, one for AC input voltage and one for
AC output voltage.
AC Input – The Input terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-110, has three terminals labeled "L" (Line or
"hot" or AC high), "N" (neutral or AC low) and "G" (chassis ground).
Jumper Configuration For Input
Of 240 VAC Vendor Information
TAP
PB3
PB2
Voltage Tap PB1
PB0
Selection Jumpers PA3
PA2
AC INPUT AC OUTPUT
PA1
PA0 L N G L N G
Vendor
Information
AC Output – The Output terminal block, as shown in Figure 2-110, has three terminals labeled "L" (line),
"N" (neutral) and "G" (chassis ground).
2.17.2.4 Configuration – The input voltages are selected with the appropriate jumpers to provide an output
voltage of 120 VAC, as shown in Table 2-45.
Note1 These voltages use only TWO wires. Connect both ends of the extra wire to PA0 to avoid losing it.
Note2 The power conditioner is shipped from Sperry Marine jumpered for 240 voltage input as a safety
precaution.
2.17.2.5 Installation Procedure – The power conditioner must be installed using the IBS installation
drawings provided and the following instructions. A typical IBS power distribution installation wiring schematic
is shown in Figure 2-111.
AC High
AC Low
IBS
Equipment
Circuit Breakers
Oneac Power
Conditioner
1. Determine from the installation drawing whether the output neutral (N) should be isolated from the
power conditioner chassis ground. The power conditioner is shipped with the output neutral (N)
connected to the chassis ground.
2. If the output neutral (N) and chassis ground are connected for the installation, all electronic equipment
to be protected by the Oneac power conditioner must be grounded to the Oneac only. Do not connect
any other grounds to the protected equipment.
3. If the output neutral (N) is to be disconnected from the chassis ground, unscrew the eight (8) screws from
the cover and remove the cover. Inside the power conditioner on the output end, remove the one (1)
green wire with a red stripe as shown in Figure 2-112 and 2-113. The green wire with a red stripe
connects the filter printed circuit board to the chassis ground stud. Replace cover.
WARNING!
If the chassis ground is removed from the power conditioner, all units receiving power
from the power conditioner must be individually grounded with chassis grounds.
Check each unit for proper voltage tap selection per Table 2-45. A voltage tap change
may be required before installation. Insure that the combined power requirements of
all equipment served by the Oneac does not exceed 2880 VA.
Transformer
Filter Printed Circuit Board
Voltage Tap
Selection
Terminal Block
Output Terminal
Block
4. The actual physical placement of the power conditioner should be as close as possible to the electronics
within the equipment enclosure.
5. The physical placement should also take into consideration that the power conditioner power input wiring
will follow the branch service circuit breakers (or disconnects and fuses).
6. Once the location for the power conditioner has been determined, the power conditioner should be bolted
firmly on a sturdy panel or structure.
WARNING!
There is no over current protection provided on these units. It is highly recommended that a
circuit breaker, or similar protection device, be installed preceding the power conditioner.
7. Check to see that the main power source and your electronic equipment are turned OFF.
8. Connect the power wiring from the power source line to the input terminals on the power conditioner.
NOTE:
Only jumper wires are to be connected to the voltage tap terminal block. Connect input
wires to the input terminal block only.
WARNING!
11. Use a voltmeter to measure voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) input terminals. If the voltage
reading is correct, the primary coils of the power conditioner are operational.
12. If there is no voltage reading, turn the main power source OFF. Disconnect the power conditioner and
contact the nearest Oneac Service Representative.
13. Measure the output voltage between the L (line) and N (neutral) terminals. The output voltage readings
should be 120 VAC. If the reading is not correct, turn the main power source OFF and recheck the
voltage tap jumpers.
14. Connect the electronic equipment to the power conditioner output terminal block terminals.
15. Turn the main power source and the electronic equipment ON.
16. Verify that the proper voltage is present at the output terminals of the power conditioner.
2.17.3.1 Manufacturer –
2.17.3.3 Interfaces – Reference Figure 2-114. Incoming power connects to the line cord receptacle. The
Vision computers connect to the output receptacles.
1. Reference Figure 2-115. Mount the UPS using two brackets, Sperry Marine P/N 1859986.
3. Connect power from the power conditioner to the line cord receptacle on the UPS.
4. Make sure all Vision equipment to be connected to the UPS is turned off.
2.18.1 CPU Upgrade Kit For 486 PCS, Sperry Marine P/N 1813194
This upgrade is for the Vision computer, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50
2.18.1.1 Kit Contents – The CPU Upgrade Kit contains the following:
NOTE:
The processor, regulator and fan/heat sink are pre-assembled at the factory.
CAUTION
This procedure is specific to the 486/66 processor shipped with VMS-VT systems.
Attempts to upgrade machines other than Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50 may result in
permanent damage to the processor chip and motherboard. Please call Charlottesville
Engineering to ensure compatibility with your system.
1. Turn of power to the computer at the front panel power switch. Remove the power plug from the rear
of the computer chassis.
2. Turn power off all peripherals connected to the computer. Remove all interface cables and move the
computer to a location where adequate light is available to view internal components.
3. Remove the computer cover. Locate the 486/66 processor (reference Figure 2-116). Be certain of the
orientation of the 486/66 processor and the location of pin 1.
4. Pin 1 of the DX5-133 assembly can be identified by the white arrow located on the 3-volt regulator
socket. This assembly comes pre-assembled to facilitate field installation. Pin 1 must be mated to pin
1 of the processor locking socket. Pin 1 of the processor locking socket is located at the base of the
locking bar. That is, when the locking bar is fully raised is points to pin 1 of the socket.
CAUTION
All parts in this kit are static sensitive. Use the ground strap provided in the kit before
handling any computer components.
5. Unplug the power plug that connects to the processor fan. Fully raise the locking bar on the locking
processor socket.
6. Remove the 486/66 processor and place on the anti-static foam pad provided in the kit.
7. Use the packing material from the DX5-133 to store the old 486/66 processor for transporting. Do not
touch the pins of either processor.
8. Insert the DX5-133 assembly into the locking socket, noting the location of pin 1. When inserted
correctly there should be a vacant row of pins around all 4 sides of the new processor. The row at one
end of the locking socket may be hidden by the regulator board.
9. Lock the processor in place by lowering the locking bar so that it’s again parallel to the motherboard.
Again note that the base of the locking bar is aligned with the white arrow (pin 1) of the DX5-133
assembly. Reconnect the power plug to the heatsink fan.
10. Re-install the cover and all peripheral cables to the computer. At power up everything should appear
normal but an overall increase in processor speed should be apparent.
11. The BIOS settings must edited. Re-boot the computer and press the “DEL” key during memory counting
to enter the BIOS setup.
12. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “ADVANCED CMOS SETUP” and press “ENTER”.
13. Press “ENTER” to enter the “Alter Options to make System Work” menu.
14. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “DRAM Wait State Selection”, then use the “PAGE UP” key to select
“0” (zero).
NOTE:
It has been observed that some computers will not run Windows NT with “0" wait states
selected. If this occurs, change the DRAM wait state selection to “1".
15. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “Decoupled Refresh Option”, then use the “PAGE UP” key to select
“ENABLED”.
16. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “Bus Clock Selection”, then use the “PAGE UP” key to select
“AUTO”.
18. Use the cursor arrows to highlight “WRITE TO CMOS AND EXIT”.
20. Re-boot the computer for the changes to take effect. Verify the new CMOS settings by repeating steps
12 through 19.
22. Return the old 486/66 processor, heatsink/fan assembly and proper documentation to Charlottesville.
The CD-ROM Reader Upgrade is used on the 486 VMS-VT computer system, Sperry Marine P/N 1810633-50.
Reference chapter 2.5 of this manual for installation of the CD-ROM.
3.1 Introduction
This chapter contains the information necessary to install and configure the software for the Integrated Bridge
Systems. The steps involved are as follows:
Some software installation also includes hardware (example, the Ethernet card). In those instances the software
installation is covered in section two. The following table details the location of all the software installation
instructions.
Off-line file management refers to the use of the Windows NT file management utilities. These utilities are
available at any IBS unit which has a keyboard and monitor attached. Off-line file management is also used for
file maintenance at any IBS station via the SeaNET network.
3.2.1.1 Re-Install Normal Windows NT Functions – During installation of the VMS software, the program
manager executable is given an alias name to prevent Windows NT from finding it. Also, the Windows NT logon
is replaced with the VMS auto-logon. The following steps re-enables Windows NT.
1. Press "CTRL-ALT-DEL" keys simultaneously and select SHUTDOWN. Then enter "OK" and
select RESTART.
2. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn
on the PC power.
3. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again.
4. At the "C:" prompt, type "cd winnt35\system32". Then type "rename pman.exe progman.exe" and
press "Enter". Reboot the computer.
1. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select FILE and RUN. At the COMMAND LINE
block, type "REGEDT32" and select "OK". Then select "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE",
"SOFTWARE", "MICROSOFT", "WINDOWSNT", "CURRENTVERSION", "WINLOGON".
Then select "AutoAdminLogon" and press "Enter".
2. Change the STRING VALUE to "0" and enter "OK". Then SHUTDOWN the system and reboot
the computer.
1. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the ADMINISTRATIVE
TOOLS icon. Then select and enter USER MANAGER and select USER followed by NEW USER.
2. At the USERNAME block, type "sperry" (lower case). Also type "sperry" (lower case) in the
PASSWORD block and in the CONFIRM PASSWORD block.
3. Select the USER CAN NOT CHANGE PASSWORD by placing an "x" in its selection box. Then
select PASSWORD NEVER EXPIRES by placing an "x" in its selection box.
4. Select PROFILE and at the LOCAL PATH heading type "c:\users\install". Then select "OK" and
return to the PROGRAM MANAGER window.
5. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select FILE and RUN. At the COMMAND LINE
block, type "REGEDT32" and select "OK". Then select "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE",
SOFTWARE, MICROSOFT, WINDOWSNT, CURRENTVERSION, and WINLOGON.
6. At the top bar, select SECURITY, PERMISSIONS, and EVERYONE. At the TYPE block, select
FULL CONTROL and enter "OK".
7. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "AutoAdminLogon". At the
DATA TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to "1" and
enter "OK". Select "DefaultUserName" and change the STRING VALUE to "sperry" and enter
"OK".
8. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "DefaultPassword". At the
DATA TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to
"sperry" and enter "OK". EXIT the REGISTRY EDITOR.
9. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select MAIN, CONTROL PANEL, and SYSTEM.
At the SHOW LIST FOR block, change the value to "1" and enter "OK". Then SHUTDOWN AND
RESTART Windows NT.
1. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select FILE and RUN. At the COMMAND LINE
block, type "REGEDT32" and select "OK". Then select "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE",
SOFTWARE, MICROSOFT, WINDOWSNT, CURRENTVERSION, and WINLOGON.
sleep5
start vms.exe
exit
4. To exit, press the <ALT> F keys simultaneously followed by "X" and select "YES" to write to the
file. SHUTDOWN Windows NT.
1. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn
on the PC power.
2. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again.
3. At the "C:" prompt, type "cd winnt35\system32". Then type "rename progman.exe pman.exe" and
press "Enter". Reboot the computer.
This procedure gives detailed instructions for installing Windows NT v3.5 on the pentium computer.
1. With the computer turned off, install a MICROSOFT MOUSE to COM1, a CD ROM reader to the
computer, and insert the Windows NT Setup Boot Disk into drive "A". Then re-boot the PC. (Note:
Pentiun PC’s have a CD ROM reader as part of the base assembly)
2. When prompted replace the Setup Boot Disk with Setup Disk #2 and press "Enter".
3. When prompted press "Enter" to SETUP WINDOWS NT NOW and press "Enter" again for EXPRESS
SETUP.
4. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #2 with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
5. When prompted press "S" to SPECIFY DEVICE DRIVER. Then select OTHER (REQUIRES DISK)
and press "Enter".
Replace setup Disk #3 with the Adaptec 7800 Family Manager Set for WinNT 3.1/d1.20 3.5x/d1
Disk and press "Enter". Press "Enter" again to select Adaptec AHA-2940/AIC-78xx <PCI> driver.
Again press "Enter" to continue with NO ADDITIONAL DRIVERS.
6. When prompted replace the Control Concepts Driver Disk with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
8. Select and enter "Load Windows NT into directory C:\FAT" to begin installing. Then select and enter
"Leave the Current File System Intact". Select and enter "Install into \WINNT 35".
9. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #3 with the Control Concepts Driver Disk and press "Enter".
11. When prompted remove the floppy disk from drive "A" and press "Enter".
12. At the NAME prompt type the "VMS-VT". At the COMPANY prompt type "SMARINE" and press
"Enter". After verifying both NAME and COMPANY press "Enter" to continue.
13. When prompted for PRODUCT ID press "Enter" to continue. Then press "Enter" again.
14. At the COMPUTER NAME prompt enter "VMS-1" for the VMS NAVIGATION STATION. If the
ship also contains a VMS PLANNING STATION, name that computer "VMS-2". For any additional
computers name them "VMS-3" through "VMS-N" where N = the final number of IBS NT computers.
Note: (If the ship does NOT contain a VMS PLANNING STATION, all computers in addition to
the VMS NAVIGATION STATION will be named "VMS-2" through "VMS-N" where N = the final
number of IBS NT computers.)
Verify the COMPUTER NAME and press "Enter". Press "Enter" again to select ENGLISH.
15. When prompted for a PRINTER LOCATION, enter "CANCEL". Enter "OK" to continue.
16. When prompted verify and enter the network card IRQ = 10 and the I/O port = 340.
Select "TCP/IP TRANSPORT" by placing an X in the box. Also clear the X indicating
NWLINK IPX/SPX COMPATIBLE TRANSPORT and press "Enter".
17. At IP ADDRESS type "89.8.1.1" for VMS-1 or "89.8.1.2 through 89.8.1.N" for each additional
computer where N = the number corresponding to the VMS-N. At DEFAULT GATEWAY type
"90.7.1.3". Then select "OK". Select "YES" to continue.
19. Enter PASSWORD = "sperry.." (in lower case letters). Then Confirm Password = "sperry.." (in lower
case letters) and enter to continue.
20. At the USER NAME prompt select and enter "CANCEL". Then select "OK" for NO LOCAL
ACCOUNT.
21. Set the Time and Date to "GMT" and also select and enter "AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST TO
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME". Then press "OK".
22. When prompted with DETECTED DISPLAY (ati compatible display adapter), press "OK".
23. Under COLOR PALETTE select "256 Colors". Under DESKTOP AREA select "1280 by 1024 pixels".
Under CHANGE DISPLAY TYPE enter "Test" and press "OK" to view the new mode. Then under
TESTING MODE select "YES" if the display test was correct. Under DISPLAY SETTINGS enter
"OK" to continue setup. Finally under LIST ALL MODES enter "OK".
24. Select "NO" to create an EMERGENCY REPAIR DISK. Then press "Restart Computer".
1. With the computer turned off, install a MICROSOFT MOUSE to COM1 and insert the Windows NT
Setup Boot Disk into drive "A". Then re-boot the PC.
2. When prompted replace the Setup Boot Disk with Setup Disk #2 and press "Enter".
3. When prompted press "Enter" to SETUP WINDOWS NT NOW and press "Enter" again for EXPRESS
SETUP.
4. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #2 with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
5. When prompted press "S" to SPECIFY DEVICE DRIVER. Then select OTHER (REQUIRES DISK)
and press "Enter".
Replace setup Disk #3 with the Control Concepts Driver Disk and press "Enter". Press "Enter"
again to select QLA400 DRIVER. Again press "Enter" to continue with NO ADDITIONAL
DRIVERS.
6. When prompted replace the Control Concepts Driver Disk with Setup Disk #3 and press "Enter".
7. If prompted, press "A" to INSTALL WINDOWS NT FROM 3.5" DISKS otherwise go to step 8.
8. Select and enter "Load Windows NT into directory C:\FAT" to begin installing. Then verify and enter
"Leave the Current File System Intact". Verify and enter "Install into \WINNT 35".
9. When prompted replace the Setup Disk #3 with the Control Concepts Driver Disk and press "Enter".
10. When prompted replace the Control Concepts Driver Disk with Setup Disk 4 and press "Enter".
11. Follow the prompts to enter Setup Disk 5 through Setup Disk 9. Then remove Setup Disk 9 and press
"Enter" to restart the computer.
12. At the NAME prompt type the "VMS-VT". At the COMPANY prompt type "SMARINE" and press
"Enter". After verifying both NAME and COMPANY press "Enter" to continue.
13. When prompted for PRODUCT ID press "Enter" to continue. Then press "Enter" again.
14. At the COMPUTER NAME prompt enter "VMS-1" for the VMS NAVIGATION STATION. If the
ship also contains a VMS PLANNING STATION, name that computer "VMS-2". For any additional
computers name them "VMS-3" through "VMS-N" where N = the final number of IBS NT computers.
(If the ship does NOT contain a VMS PLANNING STATION, all computers in addition to the
VMS NAVIGATION STATION will be named "VMS-2" through "VMS-N" where N = the
final number of IBS NT computers.)
Then verify the COMPUTER NAME and press "Enter". Press "Enter" again to select
ENGLISH.
16. When prompted verify and enter the network card IRQ = 10 and the I/O port = 340.
Select "TCP/IP TRANSPORT" by placing an X in the box. Also clear the X indicating
NWLINK IPX/SPX COMPATIBLE TRANSPORT and press "Enter".
17. Re-insert Setup Disk 9 into drive "A" and press "OK". The files will be copied into
C:\WINNT35\SYSTEM32.
18. Follow the prompts to enter Setup Disk 10 through Setup Disk 20.
19. At IP ADDRESS type "89.8.1.1" for VMS-1 or "89.8.1.2 through 89.8.1.N" for each additional
computer where N = the number corresponding to the VMS-N. At DEFAULT GATEWAY type
"90.7.1.3". Then select "OK". Select "YES" to continue.
21. Enter PASSWORD = "sperry.." (in lower case letters). Then Confirm Password = "sperry.." (in lower
case letters) and enter to continue.
22. At the USER NAME prompt select and enter "CANCEL". Then select "OK" for NO LOCAL
ACCOUNT.
23. Set the Time and Date to "GMT" and also select and enter "AUTOMATICALLY ADJUST TO
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME". Then press "OK".
24. When prompted with DETECTED DISPLAY (ati compatible display adapter), press "OK".
25. Under COLOR PALETTE select "256 Colors". Under DESKTOP AREA select "1280 by 1024 pixels".
Under CHANGE DISPLAY TYPE enter "Test" and press "OK" to view the new mode. Then under
TESTING MODE select "YES" if the display test was correct. Under DISPLAY SETTINGS enter
"OK" to continue setup. Finally under LIST ALL MODES enter "OK".
26. Select "NO" to create an EMERGENCY REPAIR DISK. Then press "Restart Computer".
1. When prompted press "CNTL-ALT-DEL" keys simultaneously. Then type "administrator" at the
Username prompt and type "sperry.." at the Password prompt.
2. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS
icon. Then select and enter USER MANAGER and select ADMINISTRATOR.
Select PROFILE and under HOME DIRECTORY select LOCAL PATH and enter "c:\users\install".
Then press "OK" twice and shutdown and restart the computer.
3. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the MS-DOS icon. Verify the
working directory is C:\USERS\INSTALL.
4. Insert the VMS-VT INSTALLATION DISK into drive A: and enter "a:\pkunzip a:\vms.zip". When
prompted to INSERT THE LAST DISK OF THE BACKUP SET, press "Enter".
1. From the WINDOWS NT MS-DOS window insert the Driver Configuration Disk (1812124A 1 of 2)
into the "A" drive and change the directory to A:\ by entering "a:". Then enter "setup".
2. Remove the disk and insert the Driver Configuration Disk (1812124A 2 of 2) into the "A" drive and
enter "copy a:.".
4. Remove the floppy disk, "shutdown" NT, and then re-start NT as ADMINISTRATOR.
1. Enter "setup2" followed by ISA and DAS. At the DAS #0 section select PORT until the ADDRESS is
set to 300-307. Then select INSTALL.
2. For additional DAS-4 cards in the same VMS computer also configure the DAS #1 and DAS #2 sections
by selecting PORT until the ADDRESS is set to 310-317 and 200-207 respectively. Then select
INSTALL followed by MAIN MENU and QUIT.
1. Enter "setup2" followed by ISA. Then select SYNCHRO followed by PORT until the ADDRESS is set
to 380-3AF.
Select INSTALL and verify a SYNCHRO VALUE WINDOW appears. Then select MAIN MENU
and QUIT. (If the SYNCHRO VALUE WINDOW did NOT appear, "shutdown and restart"
windows NT. Again select the MS-DOS window and enter "setup2". Select SYNCHRO and verify
a SYNCHRO VALUE WINDOW appears).
1. From the Windows NT Program Manager Window, select and enter the ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS
icon. Then select and enter USER MANAGER and select USER followed by NEW USER.
2. At the USERNAME block, type "sperry" (lower case). Also type "sperry" (lower case) in the
PASSWORD block and in the CONFIRM PASSWORD block.
3. Select the USER CAN NOT CHANGE PASSWORD by placing an "x" in its selection box. Then select
PASSWORD NEVER EXPIRES by placing an "x" in its selection box.
4. Select PROFILE and at the LOCAL PATH heading type "c:\users\install". Then select "OK" and return
to the PROGRAM MANAGER window.
6. At the top bar, select SECURITY, PERMISSIONS, and EVERYONE. At the TYPE block, select FULL
CONTROL and enter "OK".
7. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "AutoAdminLogon". At the DATA
TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to "1" and enter
"OK". Select "DefaultUserName" and change the STRING VALUE to "sperry" and enter "OK".
8. Select EDIT and ADD VALUE. At the VALUE NAME block, type "DefaultPassword". At the DATA
TYPE block, select REG_SZ and enter "OK". Then change the STRING VALUE to "sperry" and enter
"OK". EXIT the REGISTRY EDITOR.
9. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select MAIN, CONTROL PANEL, and SYSTEM. At the
SHOW LIST FOR block, change the value to "1" and enter "OK". Then SHUTDOWN AND
RESTART Windows NT.
1. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, select FILE and RUN. At the COMMAND LINE block,
type "REGEDT32" and select "OK". Then select "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE", SOFTWARE,
MICROSOFT, WINDOWSNT, CURRENTVERSION, and WINLOGON.
3. From the PROGRAM MANAGER window, enter the MSDOS icon and edit the VMSTART.BAT file.
Type "edit vmstart.bat" and entering the following:
sleep5
start vms.exe
exit
4. To exit, press the <ALT> F keys simultaneously followed by "X" and select "YES" to write to the file.
SHUTDOWN Windows NT.
1. With the PC power OFF, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22 Setup Disk #1 into drive "A" and turn on
the PC power.
2. Escape out of the SETUP program by pressing "F3" followed by "F3" again.
3. At the "C:" prompt, type "cd winnt35\system32". Then type "rename progman.exe pman.exe" and press
"Enter". Reboot the computer.
3. Scroll down to the "[TIME_SYNC]" block heading. Modify the [TIME_SYNC] section as shown
below:
[TIME_SYNC]
PERIOD=3.0
COUNT=20
Where the PERIOD is the time in seconds between broadcasts of the Timesync message. COUNT is
the number of timesync samples received from other nodes that are to be averaged to determine the local
clock adjustment.
4. Scroll down to the "[LINKS.xxx]" headings. Modify the [LINKS] section as shown below:
[LINKS]
PORT=6000
1=vms-1,6000
2=vms-2,6000
.
.
n=vms-n,6000
Where the [LINKS] section links the TIMESYNC PROCESS at PORT 6000 to each VMS computer
1 through n PORT number 6000.
1. Login to Windows NT and from the Program Manager select MAIN followed by PRINT MANAGER.
Then select PRINTER followed by CREATE PRINTER.
2. At the PRINTER NAME type "HP Deskjet" and then "TAB" to DRIVER and select HP DESKJET 520
and press "Enter".
3. Verify the path of the Windows NT distribution files is A:\i386\ and press "Continue".
4. Follow the prompts to insert the Windows NT Workstation CD-ROM or Setup Disk #16 into Drive A:
and press "OK". (If using Setup Disk #16, follow the prompts to insert Setup Disk #17 and Setup Disk
#19).
5. Under the PRINTER SETUP window, Verify the section entitled FORMS (SOURCE) contains AUTO
and the section entitled NAME contains LETTER.
6. Remove Setup Disk #19 from Drive A: and press "OK". Then SHUTDOWN and RESTART Windows
NT.
4.1 Introduction
This chapter contains details for interfacing different types of peripherals and external devices with Voyage
Management System (VMS) equipment: the VMS Command Station (VMS CS), Navigation Workstation and
the Planning Station. The peripheral devices are grouped into the following categories:
# Operator Input
# Operator Output
# Collision Detection/Avoidance
# Depth
# Direction
# Piloting
# Position
# Propulsion
# Speed
# Steering
# Weather
The devices for each category are listed in the tables below.
NOTE:
The devices listed in this chapter are subject to change.
** NMEA interface definition beyond the scope of this table. Refer to the manual supplied with
the device and the NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational
Devices, Version 1.5, December 1987, and Version 2.0, January 1992, published by the
National Marine Electronics Association.
Configuring VMS-VT
CONFIG.INI
1812354G
Build 2??
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EDITOR'S NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ARCS_CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
rootDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
permitTransfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
rootDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
[ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
PORTFOLIO_MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CHART_CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
COVERAGE_MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
AUTOPILOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
BASE_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SEND_SPD_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SEND_HDG_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
GAIN_SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
LDH_TIMEOUT_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NO_PLAN_ALERT_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NO_PLAN_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
NO_RESPONSE_ALARM_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
PERIOD_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
XTE_AVERAGING_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
OFFTRACK_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
[COMPORTS,<process>@<node>] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
COM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
[EXTERNAL_ALARMS@<node>] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FAILURE_UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FITNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FITNESS_TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
FITNESS_UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PULSE_DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
WARNING_TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
WARNING_UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
[FILE_MANAGER@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
[LINKS.VMS] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
[KEYBOARD@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
INSTALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
[COURSE_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
[DEPTH_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
[ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
[ENGINEROOM_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
[GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
[HEADING_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
[HUMIDITY_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
[NAVLINES_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
[POSITION_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
[PRESSURE_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
[TARGET_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
C_FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CORRELATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DELTA_POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DELTA_VELOCITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DROP_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
LOST_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
UPDATE_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
TEMPERATURE_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
[TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
[WIND_MANAGER] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
[NOTES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
[OWNSHIP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DNV_WATCH1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MAXDEEPDRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MAXSPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MAXTURNRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
MINTURNRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
[PRESENTATION_LIBRARY] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
[SAFETY_CHECKING] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DO_SHIP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DO_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DO_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
DISPLAY_SHIP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DISPLAY_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
DISPLAY_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[SCREEN_MILLIMETERS@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[SEA_PAGES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[COMPUTED_SETDRIFT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
[SERIAL_OUT<serial index>] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
BASE_PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
MSGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SHARES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SPEED_CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ENABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MANUAL_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TC_SHIP_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TC_ORDERED_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MIN_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
MAX_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ACCEL_LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
SAF_HOLD_TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
USE_SHIP_SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
NODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
BOARD_ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ORDER_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FUEL_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FUEL_CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
THROTTLE_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
RPM_CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
PROP_PITCH_CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
RPM_CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=<speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
[TOUCH_SCREEN@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
TOUCHCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
[USER_INTERFACE@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
[VIDEO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
INSTALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
[VIGILANCE_MON] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ENABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
PERIOD_MINUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
REJECT_MINUTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
RESTORE_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@node] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
[VOYAGE_PLAN] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
APPROACH_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TURN_RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
WARNING_SECONDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
config.ini EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Track Keeping and the PID Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
APPENDIX C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Sensor Offset Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
APPENDIX D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
HOW TO CONNECT BETWEEN NODES
APPENDIX E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Preventing System Errors in a VMS-VT System Without a Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
APPENDIX F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Access To OSI Weather Routing Software VIA a Novell File Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
APPENDIX G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
General Considerations when configuring SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Appendix H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connections to Novell File Servers that have NO Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
APPENDIX I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
General Considerations when Configuring Chart Directories,
Chart Catalog, and Portfolio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
APPENDIX J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ADJUSTING ANALOG VALUES IN THE [ENGINEROOM_MANAGER] SECTION OF THE VMS-VT
CONFIG.INI FILE: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
APPENDIX K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Information About Use of Portfolios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
APPENDIX L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
VMS-VT Speed Control Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
APPENDIX M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Multiple NMEA Sentences for a Given Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
APPENDIX N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Gain configuration for builds prior to 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
EDITOR'S NOTE
I had wanted to hold the release of this new version of "Configuring VMS-VT" until some additional changes and corrections
could be made. However, I see that I can not do that. It is of no use to anyone sitting on my desk but, it is very useful to those
who must configure VMS-VT systems. Be sure to look over the Build Update Reference for new VMS features (next page)
and the new information found in the Appendices at the end of the document.
If (when) you find errors please feel free to FAX or email the information to me and I will make corrections. The FAX number
is 804-974-2696 attention: Sam Gentry. My internet Email address is hsgentry@cstone.net. Sperry email ID is HSG0241.
You will notice that this document has a new name. It is now called "Configuring VMS-VT". The previous name, "Secrets of
Config.ini", was intended to indicate that we were telling everything we know about config.ini.
Build 66:
[SERIAL_OUT]
Build 70:
[ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER]
Build 93:
[SERIAL_OUT]
BASE_PERIOD
SEND_SPD_RATE
SEND_HDG_RATE
[EXTERNAL_ALARMS@vms-1]
[FILE_MANAGER]
[COMPORTS,<process>@<node>]
PLOTTER
Build 109:
[ALL_TRACK]
[OWNSHIP]
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS
Build 109.6
[COMPORTS]
COM
MARCONI
[DEPTH_MANAGER]
MARCONI
[VIDEO]
ENABLED
Build 109.9
[VIGILANCE_MON]
Build 130
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
COMPUTED
[COMPUTED_SETDRIFT]
Build 136
[AUTOPILOT]
GAIN_SET
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS
[ARCS_CHARTS]
[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS]
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
[CHART_CATALOG]
[CONNECTION]
[SHARES]
Build 163
[CHART_MANAGER] No longer required.
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA]
Build 163.17
[SPEED_CONTROL]
[AUTOPILOT]
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS
[USER_INTERFACE]
[TOUCH_SCREEN]
Build 2??
[ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA]
[AUTOPILOT]
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS
OFFTRACK_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
[KEYBOARD@node]
[USER_INTERFACE]
STYLE
[SAFETY_CHECKING]
[SCREEN_MILLIMETERS]
[TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER]
APPENDIX M
APPENDIX N
[FILE_MANAGER@node]
[TOUCH_SCREEN@node]
Build numbers are numbers that are automatically assigned by our internal version control process every time a new
INTERNAL build of VMS-VT is done. When the software is ready for test the integer part of the build number may be frozen
and a fractional part added as changes and corrections are made. e.g. Build 163 went to test and a few problems were
discovered and corrected. This resulted in 163.7. Build 163.7 was released for distribution to ships as 1812354D. Additional
corrections were applied and 163.15 was released as 1812354E and later 163.17 as 1812354F. While these corrections are
being made major new features are being added to the software. This will eventually result in a new major release to test (e.g.
228) and in time changes to that release (e.g. 228.5). It is important to note that the BUILD number is a unique identifier that
can tell the software release (e.g. 1812354F). Inside the Charlottesville facility we may have many "builds" that are never
released to ships. This build number also uniquely identifies these builds. The build numnber can be determined from any
running VMS-VT node by pressing SYSTEM MENU then DIAGNOSTICS then BUILD. All reports of problems in the in
the field MUST include the build number. Because of the version control software that we use, ANY build can be recreated.
The following table will help in determining the Software Release for a build.
93 1812354A
109.14 1812354B
109.17 1812354C
163.7 1812354D
163.15 1812354E
163.17 1812354F
2?? 1812354G
INTRODUCTION
This document describes the VMS-VT config.ini file that controls the configuration of the entire VMS-VT system. All connections
between nodes and all connections from nodes to sensors and peripheral devices are controlled by this file. With the exception of
the [KEYBOARD] block, EVERY NODE IN THE SYSTEM must have the same config.ini file.
This config.ini description is a reference for config.ini. The Build Update Reference is a chronological index to config.ini features
added in system versions after than the original.
NOTE: If this file is changed, the .dim files must be deleted. To delete the .dim files after editing the config.ini file, enter the
following command:
del *.dim
If this is not done, some of the config.ini changes may not be recognized by the system.
A copy of the config.ini file is included as APPENDIX A. This file may be used as a template for creation of usable config.ini files.
NOTE: Each definition in the configuration blocks of this file must appear on the same line. Line wrapping is not currently
supported. Display panel definition examples and formats are spanned across several lines in this document to make
the document easier to read and understand.
CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES
The release disk for VMS-VT includes a sample CONFIG.INI file. This file can be used as a starting point for the
configuration of a VMS-VT system. However, since every installaiton is different if is important to be sure that the
CONFIG.INI file has everything that it needs and nothing that it does not need. The following information is intende to help
decide what is needed and what is not needed in a specific system.
- Every CONFIG.INI must start with the [NOTES] block with at least the VERSION number. Currently there
is only one version (1). This is a convenient place to put comments (start the line with a ;) that indicate who
configured the system and what ship it is for.
- [LINKS.VMS] You may find some older versions of CONFIG.INI that have [LINKS] blocks other than
.VMS. Other than in Navy Patrol Craft installations NO [LINKS] blocks are required other than .VMS.
Every system should be configured just as shown in the example. You can delete any lines for nodes that are
not available in your system. e.g. delete the line for vms-6 if you do not have a vms-6.
- [COMPORTS...] This block describes the comports on each node of the system and the type of information
that is received or sent over that comport. NO COMPORT WILL BE AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM
UNLESS IT IS LISTED IN A COMPORT BLOCK.
- [SERIAL_OUTx] If your system requires that VMS-VT send NMEA messages to some external device then
you will need one or more [SERIAL_OUTx] block.
- [AUTOPILOT] This block is required if the VMS-VT is conected to an autopilot. The type of autopilot is
set as well as several parameters that are critical to proper control of an autopilot.
- [FILE_MANAGER] This block is required if the operator will transfer voyage plans, charts, etc between
system nodes or to other devices (e.g. APL file server).
- [OWNSHIP] This block is ALWAYS REQUIRED. If the correct information about the ship is not provided
the VMS-VT will not operate correctly.
- [VIGILANCE_MON] This block is required if the customer needs the BV Vigilance monitor option.
- [NAVLINES_MANAGER] This block is required if the customer needs the RASCAR Navlines transfer
option.
- [SETDRIFT_MANAGER] This block is required if Set and Drift are to be received from an external source.
e.g. from a GPS receiver. -OR- If Set and Drift is to be computed by the VMS-VT. If computed set and drift
are enabled see [COMPUTED_SETDRIFT]
- [TARGET_MANAGER] This block is required if the customer needs the RASCAR Target transfer option.
- [WIND_MANAGER] This block is required if wind speed and direction information is available from an
external source.
- [EXTERNAL_ALARMS...] This block is required if the customer needs the external alarms option.
- [SEA_PAGES] This block is required if the customer needs one or more of the configurable display pages.
These pages can be configured by VMS-VT engineering to display a vast array of information that is
available to the system. This information includes: navigation data, weather data, engineering data, etc.
Please refer to "Configuring VMS-VT Sea Pages" 03956-SCM-25320 for information on Sea Pages.
- [VIDEO] This block is required if the customer needs the VIDEO WINDOW option.
- [USER_INTERFACE...] This block is required if one or more nodes in the system are to use the
Configurable Standalone Display (CSD) option or the PLANNING option. The CSD option allows a
configurable display page (see SEA_PAGES]) to be the only page displayed on a node. That is, the
configurable display occupies all the display area and the standard VMS display is not available. The
PLANNING option configures the node to be a planning station.
- [ARCS_CHARTS] This block is required if British Admiralty ARCS charts are to be in use. Please note
that ARCS charts are encrypted and a security key is required to read them.
- [BSB_RASTER_CHARTS] This block is required if BSB (NOAA, NDI, etc.) charts are to be used. BSB
charts are not encrypted.
- [PORTFOLIO_MANAGER] This block is always required. The portfolio manager handles the storage of
chart portfolios.
- [SHARES] This block is required if one node is to share resources (e.g. CD ROM, disk directories) with
another node.
- [CONNECTIONS] This block is required if one node is to use shared resources on another node (see
[SHARES])
- NOTE: Every VMS-VT node must have a network adapter driver installed EVEN IF IS A ONE
NODE (STANDALONE) SYSTEM. This requirement can be met in one of two ways. If a real
network card is installed in the computer then the driver for that card must be installed. If there is
no network card then the "MS Loopback Adapter" must be installed. This is done in the same way
as installing a driver for a real network card. i.e., CONTROL PANEL | NETWORKS | ADD
ADAPTER | Select MS Loopback Adapter.
[ARCS_CHARTS@node]
Defines the location and directory names of the ARCS charts and the location of a local arcs directory.
storage=<arcs storage path 1>, <arcs storage path 2>,. . . <arcs storage path n>
<arcs storage path1> is the path to the first storage location for ARCS charts. Probably a CDROM
drive. This path may be a local path such as "charts\arcs\cd1" or a drive letter such as "e:". The
drive letter may be a local drive or a network connection.
rootDir=<local directory>
<local directory> is the name of a local directory that will be used to store files created by the vms
software. The local directory name "charts\arcs" should be used.
permitTransfer=<floppy drive>
<floppy drive> is the drive letter associated with the floppy disk drive into which the ARCS permit
diskette will be inserted when the permit is read.
Ex. [ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=c:\charts\arcs\cd1,d:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
NOTE: The permit diskette must be read by every node in the system. This can be accomplished by setting
"permitTransfer=A:" and placing the diskette in the local A: drive, selecting SYSTEM MENU, ARCS SECURITY,
and READ PERMITS. Since some nodes in the system may not have convenient access to the floppy dirve the best
way to accomplish this is to configure the system to have all nodes read the permit diskette from the floppy drive on
one of the nodes. This can be done as follows:
[SHARES@vms-3]
floppy=a:\,FULL
ARCS=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS]
p:=floppy,vms-3
r:=ARCS,vms-3
[ARCS_CHARTS]
storage=r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
You will see that because there is no node name on the [CONNECTIONS] or [ARCS_CHARTS] every node
(including VMS-3) will make a network connection to the A: and D: drive on vms-3. EVERY NODE will read the
permit diskette from vms-3.
Please refer to [VMS_SECURITY_DATA] section in this document for additional information that is
required to configure ARCS charts.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Due to an error in build 163.? the "permitTransfer" does not properly read the
@node part of the [ARCS_CHARTS@node]. Because of this error the ARCS_CHARTS must be configured
as shown above. A later release of the software will allow additional flexibility.
[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@node]
Defines the location and directory names of the NOAA charts and the location of a local NOAA directory.
storage=<noaa storage path 1>, <noaa storage path 2>,. . . <noaa storage path n>
<noaa storage path1> is the path to the first storage location for NOAA charts. Probably a
CDROM drive. This path may be a local path such as "charts\noaa\cd1" or a drive letter such as
"e:". The drive letter may be a local drive or a network connection. Please see additional
information in [shares@...] and [connections@...] in this document.
rootDir=<local directory>
<local directory> is the name of a local directory that will be used to store files created by the vms
software. The local directory name "charts\noaar" should be used.
Ex. [NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=c:\charts\noaar\cd1,d:
rootDir=charts\noaar
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS@node]
This configuration of NOAA or other BSB charts is used after build 200.
Before BUILD 200 [NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS] must be used to define NOAA charts.
Defines the location and directory names of BSB charts The BSB chart format is a rasterscan format adopted by chart
suppliers. Such suppliers include NOAA and NDI. The content lines of this section all specify a supplier and then a
comma separated list of storage locations for the charts.
Definition syntax:
Ex. [BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
NOAA=f:,s:
NDI=d:\charts\bsb\ndibsb
BSB charts can be placed either on a CDROM or on the hard disk. Some extra steps are required if the charts are
located onthe hard disk. The storage location (e.g. location 1 above or d:\charts\bsb\ndibsb in the example) must point
to a directory that contains a subdirectory called BSBCHART. A file called volume.ini must be place in the
BSBCHART directory. This file tells the VMS-VT what the volume of charts actually is. The volume.ini file is
created by the installer when the VMS-VT is installed. This file must contain the section [VOLUME_ID] and the
name of the supplier. e.g.:
[VOLUME_ID]
name=NDI
[ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA@node]
The vms can share danger area information and chart annotation information with other vms nodes on the network.
This is accomplished by adding the [ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA] section to the config.ini. This section has two
fields, local and central. Central should point to the central location where all of the data is to be stored. The central
directory can must be a directory on the planning station. Local should point to a different location that acts as like a
cache for the local nodes. The nodes do not access data stored in the central location. They access data stored in the
local location. The vms software will not allow these two fields to point to the same location.
Ex. : [ASSOCIATED_CHART_DATA]
local=local
central=q:\central
This section can be node specific(by adding @node) or used in general like the above example. At system startup, the
local directory will be wiped clean and the data in the central directory will be copied to it. If the directories do not
exist, they will be created. If this section is not in the config.ini, the user will not able to associate danger areas or chart
annotations to charts.
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER@node]
LOCATION=<folio directory>
<folio directory> is the name of the directory that will contain the folios. The directory name "folios" should
be used. The directory may be local or on a remote node. Please see additional information in [shares@...]
and [connections...] in this document.
NOTE: While it is possible to have each node in a VMS-VT system use a different folio this is not the proper
configuration. The VMS-VT system should be configured so that all nodes use one folio on one specific node.
[CHART_CATALOG@node]
LOCATION=<catalog directory>
<catalog directory> is the name of the directory that will be used as the catalog. The directory name
"catalog" should be used.
COVERAGE_MAP=<portfolio>
<portfolio> is the portfolio that will be used when displaying the graphical chart catalog. The
portfolio must be in the directory specified by LOCATION.
Ex. [CHART_CATALOG@vms-1]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[AUTOPILOT]
Definition syntax:
TYPE=<autopilot name>
(Refer to the example included with the <send period> definition for BASE_PERIOD above).
NOTE: Two methods for setting track keeping gains have been
implemented. Prior to BUILD 136 please refer to APPENDIX N for
gain configuration information. The information provided here is for
Build 136 and later.
The following lines define one gain set. The first line devines the name of the set that is seen by the operator,
two keys for dGPS and GPS gains, and the track advance for this gain set. Note: prior to build 136 the track
advance could not be set for each gain set, but was set in the [VOYAGE_PLAN]
A name that is used to identify the line that defines the PID gains that will be used
when in dGPS mode.
A name that is used to identify the line that defines the PID gains that will be used
when in non-dGPS mode.
<track advance>
The distance (in meters) prior to the wheel over point that the turn order must be
sent to the autopilot so that the ship will start the turn at the proper time.
The following lines actually contain the gain information for the GAIN SET. The key name that is used in the
GAIN SET line must match the key name that is used on these lines:
<dGPS gains key>= <P term straight dGPS>,
<I term straight dGPS>,
<D term straigh dGPSt>,
<P term turn dGPS>,
<I term turn dGPS>,
<D term turn dGPS>,
<cross track error limit distance, (meters) dGPS>,
<cross track averaging time dGPS>
I term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn. This term should always be 0.0
The distance off the track that will rresult in an off track alarm
The length of time (seconds) that cross track error will be averaged to determine
the cross track error that is used to compute the heading correction. NOTE:
Prior to build 136 this parameter could not be set for each gain set. For
builds prior to BUILD 136 please see XTE_AVERAGING_ SECONDS
below.
One GAIN_SET line and two gain key lines defines a complete gain set for dGPS and non-dGPS operation of
the PID track controller. There may be as many gain sets as necessary. The first would be GAIN_SET1, the
nest GAIN_SET2, etc.
time interval between steering messages sent to the autopilot. If this parameter is set to -1 the
sending of information to the pilot will be stopped if track keeping is stopped for some reason. This
is the proper setting for all DNV approved ships and is the recommended setting for all ships.
time interval that the LDH will wait for a message from the autopilot before SETTING OFF AN
ALARM
time interval that the system will operate with the autopilot enabled (i.e. controlling the autopilot)
but with no plan running before SETTING OFF AN ALARM
time interval between each reoccurring SETTING OFF AN ALARM event because no plan is
running
time interval the system will wait for a response from the autopilot before SETTING OFF AN
ALARM
how often the cross track error is averaged to reduce noise. NOTE: This method of setting the
cross track averaging will only work in builds prior to BUILD 136. After BUILD 136 please
see GAIN_SETn above.
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS=<status>
{ENABLED, DISABLED}
If this feature is ENABLED the operator will be asked to accept waypoint turns, but if the
turn is not approved then it will be made anyway and an operator message will be
displayed. This feature MUST be enabled on DnV watch 1 ships.
This parameter controls the rate at which the "Autopilot active and track keeping stopped"
message is displayed. This error will occur when a Voyage Plan is active but track
keeping has been stopped. This can happen for two reasons: position source is not valid or
the XTE is too large for track keeping. In the first case the Operator Message, "Position
Loss. Track keeping stopped.", will be issued. In the second case "Off track. Track
keeping stopped." will be issued. These messages are issued when the condition begins.
As long as the condition persists the message, "Autopilot active and track keeping
stopped.", will be issued every OFFTRACK_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS.
Time interval between recurring messages when the ADG3000 or ADG6000 NAV mode is selected and the
VMS-VT IS NOT following a voyage plan. The VMS-VT will default to 30 seconds if this entry is not
present.
NOTE: Be very careful when setting the TRACK ADVANCE. Prior to build 136 the
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS parameter set the Track Advance. For build 136 and later the
track advance is set for each gain set. Notice the last parameter in the GAIN_SETx lines in the
examples that follow and in the description in the previous pages. e.g. in the line
GAIN_SET1=SET 1, dGPS1, GPS1, 180 The Track Advance is 180 meters.
Ex.
[AUTOPILOT]
TYPE=ADG6000
;BASE_PERIOD=0.125
;SEND_HDG_PERIOD=0.125
;SEND_SPD_PERIOD=1.0
GAIN_SET1=SET 1, dGPS1, GPS1, 180
dGPS1= 0.13, 0.0006, -0.8, 0.255, 0.000, -1.6, 600,10
GPS1= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 600,10
GAIN_SET2=SET 2,dGPS2,GPS2,180
dGPS2= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 800,10
GPS2= 0.03, 0.00001, -0.2, 0.05, 0.000, -0.5, 800,10
GAIN_SET3=SET 3,dGPS3,GPS3,180
dGPS3= 0.02, 0.0000, -0.2, 0.03, 0.000, -0.5, 1000,10
NOTE: In this example, semicolons precede the three lines used only for simulation or trainer situations, disabling
these lines. These three lines must NOT be enabled if the system is to be used on a ship.
[COMPORTS,<process>@<node>]
Define all communication ports on a process <process> and a node <node>. This block is repeated for every node that
has communication ports.
Definition syntax:
<parity mode>
<stop bits>
<flow control>
<port type>
{AUTOPILOT,
BEEPER,
DIGITIZER,
EXT_ALARM,
MARCONI,
NAVLINES,
NMEA,
PLGR,
PLOTTER (added in Build 93),
PULSELOG,
SERIAL_OUT<serial index>,
TARGET,
UPS}
NOTE: the MARCONI port type is for use with the MARCONI Seachart 3 Depth Sounder only.
Ex. [COMPORTS.VMS@vms-1]
COM1=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,BEEPER
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,AUTOPILOT
COM4=9600,0,0,8,0,EXT_ALARM
COM5=9600,0,0,8,0,EXT_ALARM
[COMPORTS.VMS@vms-2]
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,SERIAL_OUT1
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,SERIAL_OUT2
COM4=2400,0,0,8,0,DIGITIZER
COM5=2400,0,0,8,0,PLOTTER
[CONNECTIONS@node]
Defines network connections that are to be made by the node on another node.
<localResource>=<remote node>,<shareName>
<localResource> is the local drive letter that will be assigned to the resource
<remote node> is the name of the node that will be the target of the connection
<shareName> is the name of the shared resource on the remote node. NOTE: Please see the
[shares] section and Appendix D in this document for related information.
[DATA_LOG]
NOTE: Earlier versions of CONFIG.INI may contain the following, additional lines:
OWNSHIP=ownShipDItem
1=ownShipDItem,0,1
These lines were previously used for data logging purposes, but this use has since been discontinued. They
are ignored in the current version of config.ini; therefore, they will cause no problems if they are in
config.ini.
Definition syntax:
Ex. [DATA_LOG]
PATH=.\logs
PERIOD=15.0
The dedicated port(s) for the external alarms must be defined in the [COMPORTS.<port>@<node>] block for the
local machine to enable the external alarms. The port type for the dedicated external alarms port(s) is EXT_ALARM.
An external alarm can only be assigned to one of the two control lines for a serial port; therefore, at least two serial
ports on the local machine must be dedicated to the external alarms for all three external alarms to be configured. (See
the definition of COM4 and COM5 on vms-1 in the example given for a [COMPORTS.<process>@<node>] block
above).
Definition syntax:
NOTE: The EXTERNAL SYSTEM FAILURE ALARM is immediately activated when a system
failure is detected.
time VMS waits for operator acknowledgement of system warnings once a warning has been
detected
Ex. [EXTERNAL_ALARMS@vms-1]
PULSE_DURATION=0.5
FAILURE_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_TIMEOUT=1.0
FITNESS_UPDATE=1.0
FITNESS_TIMEOUT=600.0
FITNESS=COM3,DTR,HIGH
FAILURE=COM3,RTS,HIGH
WARNING=COM4,RTS,LOW
Define the file manager links to drives on other computers. This feature is primarily intended to provide a link to the
APL NOVELL file server.
Definition syntax:
<link index>
Ex. [FILE_MANAGER]
1=Drive A,A:,\
2=vms-1,c:,users\install
NOTE: Please read APPENDIX D for additional information required to make FILE_MANAGER connections
to other nodes.
[LINKS.VMS]
Definition syntax:
PORT=<common port>
number of the port to be opened by the system for intracommunication among the system
workstations
<link index>
<node>
<common port>
NOTE: <common port> in each link definition must be the same <common port> used
to define PORT
NOTE: The entire concept of LINKS and port numbers can be simplified for normal VMS-VT use by
including the following example and enabling as many nodes as are included in the system. Any
unused node names should be deleted or additional names added if required. Future VMS-VT
systems may require additional [LINKS] blocks.
IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE PORT NUMBER SELECTED FOR VMS BE DIFFERENT FROM THE
PORT NUMBER SELECTED FOR TIMESYNC. PLEASE REFER TO "SECRETS OF
TIMESYNC.INI" 03956-SCM-25289 FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT TIMESYNC.
Ex. [LINKS.VMS]
PORT=5000
1=vms-1,5000
2=vms-2,5000
3=vms-3,5000
4=vms-4,5000
5=vms-5,5000
6=vms-6,5000
[KEYBOARD@node]
Definition syntax:
Ex. [KEYBOARD]
INSTALLED = FALSE
NOTE: See APPENDIX E for more information information relating to VMS-VT systems WITHOUT a real
keyboard.
The capability to make [KEYBOARD] node specific (@node) was added in build 220.
MANAGERS:
The following fourteen managers each keep track of a different type of information. Each manager must know the source of this
information in the system since a specific device may be interfaced to more than one node, and different devices providing the
same type of information may be interfaced to one node. The general definition syntax for these managers is the same.
NOTE: Several MANAGERS require an x,y offset for the associated sensors. A description of this offset can be found
in APPENDIX C.
NOTE: Starting with build 220, when a MANAGER requires a NMEA message type (e.g. GPGGA) it is possible to
configure more than one type on a single line. This feature may be used only in very special cases and if it is used
incorrectly may result in loss of sensor data. PLEASE READ APPENDIX M of this document BEFORE using this
configuration.
[COURSE_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
This name can be any string, but the same device should have the same name everywhere
that it appears in the system.
<process>
<node>
<port number>
x offset of the device in meters from the center line of the ship. See APPENDIX C
y offset of the device in meters from the bow of the ship. See APPENDIX C.
type of the ith NMEA message that will be used if <data format> is NMEA
Ex. [COURSE_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPVTG
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,GPVTG
[DEPTH_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
This name can be any string, but the same device should have the same name everywhere
that it appears in the system.
<process>
<node>
<port number>
x offset of the device in meters from the center line of the ship. See APPENDIX C
y offset of the device in meters from the bow of the ship. See APPENDIX C.
type of the ith NMEA message that will be used if <data format> is NMEA
Ex. [DEPTH_MANAGER]
1=DEPTH,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,3,0,0,SDDBT
2=MARCONI,VMS@vms-3,MARCONI,3,0,0
NOTE: The MARCONI data format is for use with the MARCONI Seachart 3 depth sounder only.
Definition syntax:
This name can be any string, but the same device should have the same name everywhere
that it appears in the system.
<process>
<node>
{NMEA}
<port number>
<NMEA identifier>
{ERPNT}
specifies the engine room point number that is associated with the data
<gain>
<offset>
<conversion factor>
The data that is received in the message will be multiplied by <gain>, then <offset> will
be added and the result will be multiplied by <conversion factor>. These three
parameters allow a very flexible conversion of any data into any scale or units. In most
cases the adjustment of these parameters is easier if <conversion factor> is set to 1.0.
Ex. [ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER]
1=GEN1_POWR,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,1,1.0,0.0,1.0
2=GEN2_POWR,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,2,1.0,0.0,1.0
3=GEN3_POWR,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,3,1.0,0.0,1.0
4=GEN4_POWR,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,4,1.0,0.0,1.0
5=OIL_PRESS,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,5,1.0,0.0,0.6894757
[ENGINEROOM_MANAGER]
Please see APPENDIX J of this document for information on the configuration of the [ENGINEROOM_MANAGER]
[GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
Ex. [GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPVTG
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,GPVTG
[HEADING_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
x offset of the device in meters from the center line of the ship. See APPENDIX C
y offset of the device in meters from the bow of the ship. See APPENDIX C.
Ex. [HEADING_MANAGER]
1=GYRO,VMS@vms-6,SYNCHRO,1,0,0
2=GYRO,VMS@vms-3,SYNCHRO,1,0,0
3=GYRO,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,6,0,0,HEHDT
4=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
5=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
[HUMIDITY_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
Ex. [HUMIDITY_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,WIMHU
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,WIXDR
[NAVLINES_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<RASCAR index>
<process>, <node>
Ex. [NAVLINES_MANAGER]
PATH=.\navlines
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6
NOTE: For the VMS-VT NAVLINES option to work correctly the RASCAR must be configured as a position
source in [POSITION_MANAGER]. This situation will be corrected in a later release of VMS-VT
software.
[POSITION_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
NOTE: GPGLL must NEVER be used as a source of GPS position. The GPGGA message must be used. The
GPGLL message does not indclude information required to warn the operator if the GPS has gone into DR
mode. If GPGGA is the only position sentence available from the GPS then you MUST CONTACT Field
Engineering in Charlottesville for instrucitons. The GLL messages are acceptable from Loran or Decca.
Ex. [POSITION_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPGGA
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,GPGGA
3=LORAN-C,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,9,0,0,LCGLL
4=LORAN-C,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,9,0,0,LCGLL
5=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
6=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
[PRESSURE_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
Ex. [PRESSURE_MANAGER]
1=PUMP1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
NOTE: For internally computed set and drift add a line to the [SETDRIFT_MANAGER] as follows:
<handle index>=COMPUTED,VMS,COMPUTED,COMPUTED,0,0
Ex. [SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
3=COMPUTED,VMS,COMPUTED,COMPUTED,0,0
[TARGET_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
This parameter must be unique if more than one target correlator exists.
<process>, <node>
distance between two targets that will cause the targets to fail correlation
velocity difference in meters/second between two targets that will cause the targets to fail correlation
<handle index>
<process>,
<node>,
<number of the port the device is connected to>,
<x offset, (meters)>,
<y offset, (meters)>,
Target source indicators correspond to bit positions; therefore, a target source indicator
must be a member of the set {0, 1, 2, 4, 8,16, etc.}. The same target source on a different
computer must have the same source indicator (e.g. RASCAR_PORT has the same target
source indicator despite where it is connected).
<target type>
Ex. [TARGET_MANAGER]
CORRELATOR=TARGET CORRELATOR,VMS@vms-1
LOST_PERIOD=15.0
DROP_PERIOD=30.0
UPDATE_PERIOD=5.0
DELTA_POSITION=500.0
C_FACTOR=1.1
DELTA_VELOCITY=1.0
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-5,TARGET,4,0,0,5,16,4,1,RASCAR_PORT
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-5,TARGET,5,0,0,5,16,2,1,RASCAR_STBD
3=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,10,0,0,5,16,4,1,RASCAR_PORT
4=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,6,0,0,5,16,2,1,RASCAR_STBD
5=GPS_TARGETS,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,1,0,0,1,120,8,1,GPS Targets
[TEMPERATURE_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
Ex. [TEMPERATURE_MANAGER]
1=THERMO1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG
[TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER]
Defines a manager to handle the special configuration information provided by a Trimble GPS. The Trimble GPS has
been modified for Sperry to provide internal configuration information to the VMS-VT. This information allows the
VMS-VT to alarm the operator if the GPS is configured in a unsafe way.
Definition syntax:
Ex. [TRIMBLE_CONFIGURATION_MANAGER]
1=GPS1,VMS@vms-1,TRIMBLE,2,0,0,1
[WATERSPEED_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
Ex. [WATERSPEED_MANAGER]
1=SRD-331,VMS@vms-6,PULSELOG,2,0,0
2=SRD-331,VMS@vms-3,PULSELOG,2,0,0
3=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
4=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
[WIND_MANAGER]
Definition syntax:
<handle index>
Ex. [WIND_MANAGER]
1=WEATHERPAK,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,7,0,0,IIMWV
2=WEATHERPAK,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,8,0,0,IIMWV
[NOTES]
Definition syntax:
Ex. [NOTES]
VERSION=1
[OWNSHIP]
Definition syntax:
NAME=<ship name>
Ex. [OWNSHIP]
NAME=PC Ships
LENGTH=50.0
BEAM=10.0
MAXSPD=20.0
MAXTURNRATE=0.1
MINTURNRADIUS=400.0
MAXDEEPDRAFT=5.0
DNV_WATCH1=FALSE
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=30.0
[PRESENTATION_LIBRARY]
The section [PRESENTATION_LIBRARY] configures the location of the presentation library. the keyword 'location'
specifies a full path to the presentation library. For example, if the presentation library is located on drive c: in the
usr\local directory, then the configuration would be:
[PRESENTATION_LIBRARY@vms-1]
location=c:\usr\local
This section does not have to be node specific. If this section is not specified, the vms will default the directory location
to the current vms directory. If this section has been configured correctly, the message "7Cs Ecdis kernel version:
SevenCs EC2007 ECDIS Kernel Version" will appear in the log file.
[SAFETY_CHECKING]
Definition syntax:
DO_SHIP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DO_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DO_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_CHECKING_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
These three flags will enable the three types of safety checking. SHIP_CHECKING will check the future position of
the ship along the heading vector for danger areas. RUNNING_VP will check the voyage plan that is currently
running for danger areas. VP_EDITOR will check the voyage plan, while in the voyage plan editor, for danger areas.
Three additional flags control the diaplay of safety zones. They are:
DISPLAY_SHIP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DISPLAY_RUNNING_VP_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
DISPLAY_VP_EDITOR_SAFETY_ZONE_BOOL=<TRUE, FALSE>
If safety checking of a given type is being done, the DISPLAY flag of the same type controls whether the safety zone
for that safety checker is diaplayed.
[SCREEN_MILLIMETERS@node]
Definition syntax:
width=<width>
height=<height>
[SEA_PAGES]
NOTE!
A new document describing the Sea Pages configuration in detail is now available.
Please refer to "Configuring VMS-VT Sea Pages" 03956-SCM-25320
for detailed information. The [SEA_PAGES] section has been removed from this document.
The COMPUTED_SETDRIFT section is no longer required in config.ini. All of the parameters previously set by this
seciton have defaults that provide correct operation. Please remove this section from your config.ini file. In some
VERY special cases IBS Engineering may ask that one or more of the parameters be restored to the config.ini file.
Define message information for a serial communication port. A [SERIAL_OUT<serial index>] block must be defined for any
SERIAL_OUT<serial index> used in a [COMPORTS.<process>@<node>] block. (See the SERIAL_OUT<serial index>
reference in the example above for a [COMPORTS.<process>@<node>] block).
NOTE: This version of SERIAL_OUT was implemented in version 66. The previous version implemented in Build 55 had
limited capability and was configured in a slightly different way. If it is necessary to configure SERIAL_OUT in version 55,
please contact SMI IBS engineering at the Charlottesville, Virginia, U.S.A. location.
Definition syntax:
<message index>
(Refer to the example included with the <send rate> definition for BASE_PERIOD
above).
Ex. [SERIAL_OUT1]
BASE_PERIOD=1.0
MSGOUT1=DBT,1.0
MSGOUT2=GGA,2.0
MSGOUT3=STA,3.0
MSGOUT4=HDT,1.0
MSGOUT5=PNT,10.0,R1ANG,1
[SHARES@node}
<shareName>=<path>,<access>
<shareName> is the shared resource name that will be seen by other nodes
NOTE: Please see the section [CONNECTIONS] and Appendix D for related information.
[SPEED_CONTROL]
Define various control items for a SPEED CONTROL. NOTE: See related section [SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx].
Please see APPENDIX G for general information relating to speed control configuration.
Definition syntax:
ENABLED=<status>
<status>
{ON, OFF}
MANUAL_SPEED=<status>
<status>
{ON, OFF.}
TC_SHIP_SPEED=<tc ship>
<tc ship>
{4 to 40}
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE=<tca advance>
<tcs advance>
{60 to 2400}.
TC_ORDERED_SPEED=<tc order>
<tc order>
time constant (seconds) used in computing and filtering ordered speed integrator. Default
= 600.
{150 to 2400}
MIN_SPEED=<min speed>
<min speed>
minimum ownship speed for speed control. Units M/S. Default = 5.14 (10 knots).
MAX_SPEED=<max speed>
<max speed>
maximum ownship speed for speed control. Units M/S. Default = 27.5 (50 knots).
ACCEL_LIMIT=<acc lim>
<acc lim>
SAF_HOLD_TIME=<hold time>
<hold time>
time from end of voyage when speed will not be adjusted by control system. Units
HOURS. Default = 0.5.
{0.25 to 2.0}
USE_SHIP_SPEED=<speed status>
<speed status>
{ON, OFF}
Ex. [SPEED_CONTROL]
ENABLED=ON
MANUAL_SPEED=OFF
TC_SHIP_SPEED=10
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE=300
TC_ORDERED_SPEED=600
MIN_SPEED=2
MAX_SPEED=25
ACCEL_LIMIT=19
SAF_HOLD_TIME=0.25
USE_SHIP_SPEED=ON
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx]
Defines a speed control device handler (LDH). A configuration file may have one or more of these sections. The first
section will be [SPEED_CONTROL_LDH1], the second [SPEED_CONTROL_LDH2], etc. Multiple LDHs per
node are allowed. NOTE: See related section [SPEED_CONTROL]. Please see APPENDIX G for general
information relating to speed control configuration.
Definition Syntax:
NODE=<process>@<node>
<process>
the process that will handle the speed control (normally VMS)
<node>
TYPE=<control type>
<control type>
{KAMEWA_OLD, KAMEWA_NEW.}
BOARD_ID=<board>
<board>
{0, 1}
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL=<avail channel>
<avail channel>
{0,1,2,3}
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE=<avail sense>
<avail sense>
{0, 1}
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL=<request channel>
<request channel>
{0, 1, 2, 3}
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE=<request sense>
<request sense>
{0, 1}
CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL=<grant channel>
<grant channel>
{0,1,2,3}
CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE=<grant sense>
<grant sense>
{0, 1}
LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL=<selected channel>
<selected channel>
selects digital channel to be used to indicate which LDH is in control. External logic must
be provided to activate only one LDH.
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE=<selectedt sense>
<selected sense>
{0, 1}
ORDER_CHANNEL=<order channel>
<order channel>
{0, 1}
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD=
<speed 1>,<volts 1>,<speed 2>,<volts 2>. . . <speed n>,<volts n>
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD is a table for mapping ordered speed (M/S) to volts when the ship is
loaded. The mapping table is comprised of ordered pairs representing a piecewise linear curve fit.
e.g. <speed 1> will be ordered with <volts 1> volts, <speed 2> will be ordered with <volts 2> volts.
While the actual number of speed/volts pairs is almost unlimited, there is rerely need for more than 4
or 5 pairs.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=
<speed 1>,<volts 1>,<speed 2>,<volts 2>. . . <speed n>,<volts n>
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD is a table for mapping ordered speed (M/S) to volts when the ship is
light. The mapping table is comprised of ordered pairs representing a piecewise linear curve fit. e.g.
<speed 1> will be ordered with <volts 1> volts, <speed 2> will be ordered with <volts 2> volts.
While the actual number of speed/volts pairs is almost unlimited, there is rerely need for more than 4
or 5 pairs.
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL=<override channel>
<override channel>
selects digital channel for named signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
{0, 1, 2, 3}
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE=<override sense>
<override sense>
selects polarity for the signal active state (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
{(0, 1}
FUEL_CHANNEL=<fuel channel>
<fuel channel>
selects the analog channel for fuel signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
FUEL_CAL is a table for mapping fuel consumption (volts) to liters/hour. See SPEED_CAL for
format (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_OLD)
THROTTLE_CHANNEL=<throttle channel>
<throttle channel>
selects analog channel for the throttle signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL=<pitch channel>
<pitch channel>
selects analog channel for the PITCH signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
RPM_CHANNEL=<rpm channel>
<rpm channel>
selects analog channel for the RPM signal (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD is a table for mapping throttle (volts) to speed (M/S) when the ship
is loades. See SPEED_CAL for format (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD is a table for mapping throttle (volts) to speed (M/S) when the
ship is light. See SPEED_CAL for format (used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
PROP_PITCH_CAL=<volts1>,<power1>,<volts2>,<power2>... <voltsn>,<powern>
PITCH_CAL is a table for mapping prop pitch (volts) to power (%, expressed as a decimal number in
the range of 0.0 to 1.0).
RPM_CAL is a table for mapping rpm (volts) to rpms. See SPEED_CAL for format (used only when
TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=<speed tolerance>
<speed tolerance>
throttle must follow speed order within this tolerance (M/S) to prevent manual override.
Used only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE=<time tolerance>
<time tolerance>
throttle must follow speed order within this tolerance (SECONDS) to prevent manual override. Used
only when TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW)
SIMULATION=<sim status>
<sim status>
{ON, OFF}
Ex. [SPEED_CONTROL_LDH1]
NODE=VMS@vms-1
TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW
BOARD_ID=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE=1
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE=1
CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL=1
CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE=1
LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL=2
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE=1
ORDER_CHANNEL=1
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,0,25,5
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,0.5,25,4.5
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL=3
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE=1
FUEL_CHANNEL=0
FUEL_CAL=0,1000,5,0
THROTTLE_CHANNEL=0
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL=1
PROP_PITCH_CAL=0,0,5,1
RPM_CHANNEL=2
RPM_CAL=0,0,5,800
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=0.25
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE=3.0
SIMULATION=OFF
Enables touch screen calibration from within VMS-VT. A Touch Screen button will appear on the System Menu that
allows the user to calibrate the touchscreen from within VMS-VT. This feature is available in VMS-VT build 163.17
and later.
NOTE: This feature will not work and may crash VMS-VT unless the Microtouch touch screen driver has
been installed. Please refer to 03956-1813232 "Microtouch Touch Screen Driver" for more information.
Definition syntax:
TOUCHCAL=<path>\winpanel /c
<path> is the path to the winpanel.exe. Normally this will be c:\mtsnt. The /c switch starts winpanel
in the calibration mode and is required for proper operation of the touch screen from VMS-VT.
Ex.
[TOUCH_SCREEN]
TOUCHCAL=c:\mtsnt\winpanel /c
[USER_INTERFACE@node]
Definition syntax:
{CSD,VMS, PLANNING}
Ex. [USER_INTERFACE@vms-6]
STYLE=VMS
[VIDEO]
INSTALLED=<video status>
{TRUE, FALSE}
Ex. [VIDEO]
INSTALLED=TRUE
NOTE: Special hardware is required to make the Video Window work with VMS-VT.
[VIGILANCE_MON]
Control the vigilance monitor. To have this feature, ENABLED must be present and TRUE. Timeouts are optional:
period of questions (minutes), time allowed after reject (minutes) and time before question after operator failure
(seconds) The operator will be questioned every PERIOD_MINUTES minutes and may delay the answer two times
for REJECT_MINUTES minutes each time. If the operator fails the test the VIGILANCE alarm will be sounded and
the operator will be questioned every RESTORE_SECONDS until a question is answered correctly.
Definition syntax:
{TRUE, FALSE}
PERIOD_MINUTES=<period, (minutes)>
The time between questions after an operator has failed the test.
Ex. [VIGILANCE_MON]
ENABLED=TRUE
PERIOD_MINUTES=35.0
REJECT_MINUTES=5.0
RESTORE_SECONDS=5.0
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@node]
Definition syntax:
security_block=<block type>
{SSI,NONE}
timeout=<seconds>
period=<seconds>
Ex. [VMS_SECURITY_DATA@vms-1]
security_block=SSI
timeout=3600
period=600
NOTE: If a security block is present on one node of a system and not present on other nodes then the node with the
security block muse have [VMS_SECURITY_DATA] with security_block=SSI and all other nodes must have
[VMS_SECUTIRY_DATA] with security_block=NONE.
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@vms-1]
security_block=SSI
timeout=3600
period=600
[VMS_SECURITY_DATA@vms-2]
security_block=NONE
timeout=3600
period=600
[VOYAGE_PLAN]
Definition syntax:
time in seconds prior to the wheel over point that the APPROACHING TURN WARNING is
announced.
distance prior to the wheel over point that the change course order is given to the autopilot
This advance allows the ship to correctly enter the turn even with some delay in the pilot and
hydraulics. NOTE: this method of setting track advance can be used in builds prior to
BUILD 136. For BUILD 136 and later please see the [AUTOPILOT] section.
time interval prior to the wheel over point that the ADVANCED APPROACH WARNING is
issued
Ex. [VOYAGE_PLAN]
PATH=.\plans
WARNING_SECONDS=300.0
APPROACH_SECONDS=60.0
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS=180.0
TURN_RATE=0.01
APPENDIX A
config.ini EXAMPLE
[NOTES]
VERSION=1
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=c:\charts\arcs\cd1,d:
rootDir=charts\arcs
[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=d:,r:
rootDir=charts\noaar
[NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS@vms-2]
storage=d:,r:
rootDir=charts\noaar
[CHART_CATALOG@vms-1]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
r:=vms-2,cdrom
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-2,cdrom
s:=vms-2,vms
[SHARES@vms-2]
cdrom=d:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-1]
vms=c:\users\install,FULL
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER@vms-1]
LOCATION=folios
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER@vms-2]
LOCATION=s:\folios
[CHART_CATALOG@vms-1]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[CHART_CATALOG@vms-2]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[LINKS.VMS]
PORT=5000
1=vms-1,5000
2=vms-2,5000
3=vms-3,5000
4=vms-4,5000
5=vms-5,5000
6=vms-6,5000
[COMPORTS.VMS@vms-1]
COM1=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,BEEPER
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,AUTOPILOT
COM4=9600,0,0,8,0,EXT_ALARM
COM5=9600,0,0,8,0,EXT_ALARM
[COMPORTS.VMS@vms-2]
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,SERIAL_OUT1
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,SERIAL_OUT2
COM4=2400,0,0,8,0,DIGITIZER
COM5=2400,0,0,8,0,PLOTTER
[COMPORTS.VMS@vms-3]
COM2=1200,0,0,8,0,UPS
COM3=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM4=4800,0,0,8,0,MARCONI
COM7=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM8=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM9=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
[COMPORTS.TC@vms-5]
COM4=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
COM5=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
[COMPORTS.VMS@vms-6]
COM2=4800,0,0,8,0,PULSELOG
COM3=2400,0,0,8,0,NAVLINES
COM5=2400,0,0,8,0,NAVLINES
COM6=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
COM7=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM8=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM9=4800,0,0,8,0,NMEA
COM10=4800,0,0,8,0,TARGET
[SERIAL_OUT1]
BASE_PERIOD=1.0
MSGOUT1=DBT,1.0
MSGOUT2=GGA,2.0
MSGOUT3=STA,3.0
MSGOUT4=HDT,1.0
MSGOUT5=PNT,10.0,R1ANG,1
[SERIAL_OUT2]
BASE_PERIOD=0.5
MSGOUT1=VBW,1.0
MSGOUT2=HDT,4.0
[AUTOPILOT]
TYPE=ADG6000
;BASE_PERIOD=0.125
;SEND_HDG_PERIOD=0.125
;SEND_SPD_PERIOD=1.0
GAIN_SET1=SET 1, dGPS1, GPS1, 180
dGPS1= 0.13, 0.0006, -0.8, 0.255, 0.000, -1.6, 600,10
GPS1= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 600,10
GAIN_SET2=SET 2,dGPS2,GPS2,180
dGPS2= 0.07, 0.0003, -0.4, 0.13, 0.000, -1.0, 800,10
GPS2= 0.03, 0.00001, -0.2, 0.05, 0.000, -0.5, 800,10
GAIN_SET3=SET 3,dGPS3,GPS3,180
dGPS3= 0.02, 0.0000, -0.2, 0.03, 0.000, -0.5, 1000,10
GPS3= 0.02, 0.0001, -0.2, 0.03, 0.000, -0.5, 1000,10
LDH_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=15.0
LDH_PERIOD_SECONDS=1.0
NO_RESPONSE_ALARM_SECONDS=30
NO_PLAN_ALERT_SECONDS=30
NO_PLAN_REANNOUNCE_SECONDS=30
PERIOD_SECONDS=1
ALWAYS_ACCEPT_TURNS=ENABLED
[VOYAGE_PLAN]
PATH=.\plans
WARNING_SECONDS=300.0
APPROACH_SECONDS=60.0
TRACK_ADVANCE_METERS=180.0
TURN_RATE=0.01
[FILE_MANAGER]
2=vms-1,c:,users\install
3=Drive A,A:,\
[CHART_MANAGER]
PATH=.\charts
[OWNSHIP]
NAME=PC Ships
LENGTH=50.0
BEAM=10.0
MAXSPD=20.0
MAXTURNRATE=0.1
MINTURNRADIUS=400.0
MAXDEEPDRAFT=5.0
DNV_WATCH1=FALSE
SENSOR_TIMEOUT_SECONDS=30.0
[VIGILANCE_MON]
ENABLED=TRUE
PERIOD_MINUTES=35.0
REJECT_MINUTES=5.0
RESTORE_SECONDS=5.0
[KEYBOARD]
INSTALLED = FALSE
[COURSE_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPVTG
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,GPVTG
[DATA_LOG]
PATH=.\logs
PERIOD=15.0
[DEPTH_MANAGER]
1=DEPTH,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,3,0,0,SDDBT
2=MARCONI,VMS@vms-3,MARCONI,4,0,0
[ENGINEPOINT_MANAGER]
1=GEN1_POWR, VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,1,1.0,0.0,1.0
2=GEN2_POWR, VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,2,1.0,0.0,1.0
3=GEN3_POWR, VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,3,1.0,0.0,1.0
4=GEN4_POWR, VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,4,1.0,0.0,1.0
5=OIL_PRESS, VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,ERPNT,5,1.0,0.0,0.6894757
[GROUNDSPEED_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPVTG
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,GPVTG
[HEADING_MANAGER]
1=GYRO,VMS@vms-6,SYNCHRO,1,0,0
2=GYRO,VMS@vms-3,SYNCHRO,1,0,0
3=GYRO,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,6,0,0,HEHDT
4=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
5=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
[HUMIDITY_MANAGER]
[NAVLINES_MANAGER]
PATH=.\navlines
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6
[POSITION_MANAGER]
1=GPS,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,7,0,0,GPGGA
2=GPS,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,8,0,0,GPGGA
3=LORAN-C,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,9,0,0,LCGLL
4=LORAN-C,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,9,0,0,LCGLL
5=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
6=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
[PRESSURE_MANAGER]
1=PUMP1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG
[SETDRIFT_MANAGER]
1=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
2=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
3=COMPUTED,VMS,COMPUTED,COMPUTED,0,0
[TARGET_MANAGER]
CORRELATOR=TARGET CORRELATOR,VMS@vms-1
LOST_PERIOD=15.0
DROP_PERIOD=30.0
UPDATE_PERIOD=5.0
DELTA_POSITION=500.0
C_FACTOR=1.1
DELTA_VELOCITY=1.0
1=RASCAR_PORT,TC@vms-5,TARGET,4,0,0,5,16,4,1,RASCAR_PORT
2=RASCAR_STBD,TC@vms-5,TARGET,5,0,0,5,16,2,1,RASCAR_STBD
3=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,10,0,0,5,16,4,1,RASCAR_PORT
4=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,6,0,0,5,16,2,1,RASCAR_STBD
5=GPS_TARGETS,VMS@vms-6,TARGET,1,0,0,1,120,8,1,GPS Targets
[TEMPERATURE_MANAGER]
1=THERMO1,VMS@vms-1,NMEA,1,0,0,GPVTG
[WATERSPEED_MANAGER]
1=SRD-331,VMS@vms-6,PULSELOG,2,0,0
2=SRD-331,VMS@vms-3,PULSELOG,2,0,0
3=RASCAR_PORT,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,3,0,0
4=RASCAR_STBD,VMS@vms-6,NAVLINES,5,0,0
[WIND_MANAGER]
1=WEATHERPAK,VMS@vms-6,NMEA,7,0,0,IIMWV
2=WEATHERPAK,VMS@vms-3,NMEA,8,0,0,IIMWV
[VIDEO]
INSTALLED=TRUE
[EXTERNAL_ALARMS@vms-1]
PULSE_DURATION=0.5
FAILURE_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_UPDATE=1.0
WARNING_TIMEOUT=1.0
FITNESS_UPDATE=1.0
FITNESS_TIMEOUT=600.0
FITNESS=COM4,DTR,HIGH
FAILURE=COM4,RTS,HIGH
WARNING=COM5,RTS,LOW
[SPEED_CONTROL]
ENABLED=ON
MANUAL_SPEED=OFF
TC_SHIP_SPEED=10
TC_SPEED_ADVANCE=300
TC_ORDERED_SPEED=600
MIN_SPEED=2
MAX_SPEED=25
ACCEL_LIMIT=19
SAF_HOLD_TIME=0.25
USE_SHIP_SPEED=ON
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDH1]
NODE=VMS@vms-1
TYPE=KAMEWA_NEW
BOARD_ID=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_AVAIL_SENSE=1
CONTROL_REQUEST_CHANNEL=0
CONTROL_REQUEST_SENSE=1
CONTROL_GRANT_CHANNEL=1
CONTROL_GRANT_SENSE=1
LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL=2
LDH_SELECTED_SENSE=1
ORDER_CHANNEL=1
ORDER_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,0,25,5
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,0.5,25,4.5
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_CHANNEL=3
MANUAL_OVERRIDE_SENSE=1
FUEL_CHANNEL=0
FUEL_CAL=0,1000,5,0
THROTTLE_CHANNEL=0
THROTTLE_CAL_FULL_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,25,0.15,20,0.3,16,0.625,12,1.1,8,2.2,4,5,0
PROP_PITCH_CHANNEL=1
PROP_PITCH_CAL=0,0,5,1
RPM_CHANNEL=2
RPM_CAL=0,0,5,800
THROTTLE_SPEED_TOLERANCE=0.25
THROTTLE_TIME_TOLERANCE=3.0
SIMULATION=OFF
[USER_INTERFACE@vms-6]
STYLE=VMS
[SEA_PAGES]
CID=CONNING INFORMATION DISPLAY
CURRENT=SET AND DRIFT,POPUP,0.3,0.4
[CURRENT]
INTERACTIVE=FALSE
GRID_COLUMNS=1
GRID_ROWS=1
WIND=1,1,1,1,TRUE,FALSE,TWSPD,TWSPDSTAT,TWDIR,TWDIRSTAT,TSDMAG,TSDMAGSTAT,TSDDIR,TSDDIR
STAT,TSDSEN,TSDSENSTAT
[CID]
INTERACTIVE=FALSE
GRID_COLUMNS=20
GRID_ROWS=40
; column1
WIND=1,1,14,5,TRUE,FALSE,TWSPD,TWSPDSTAT,TWDIR,TWDIRSTAT,TSDMAG,TSDMAGSTAT,TSDDIR,TSDDI
RSTAT,TSDSEN,TSDSENSTAT
LABEL=16,3,17,4,ENGINE
GVSPNL=18,4,32,6,RPM,-200,200,BOTTOM,40,20,40,FALSE,3,0,0,1,1,FALSE,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
FPNLWU=35,1,37,5,FUEL,LEFT,Flow,9999,0.1,FALSE,FUELCON,FUELCONSTAT
LOCALTIME=39,1,40,5
;column 2
;HEADING=1,7,5,14,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT,HEADINGSEN,HEADINGSENSTAT
FPNL=1,7,2,12,HDG,LEFT,ACT,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT
HSCALE=3,7,5,14,-100,100,LEFT,20,10,20,BOTH,FALSE,57.2975,0.03491,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT
FPNL=6,7,7,12,HDG,LEFT,ORD,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,HDGORD,HDGORDSTAT
FPNL=9,7,10,12,ROT,LEFT,D/M,3,0,0,3439.49,FALSE,TURNRATE,TURNRATESTAT
HSCALE=11,7,13,14,-100,100,LEFT,20,10,20,BOTH,FALSE,3439.49,1,TURNRATE,TURNRATESTAT
FPNL=14,7,15,12,ROT,LEFT,ORD,3,0,0,3439.49,FALSE,TURNRATE,TURNRATESTAT
;GHSPNL=13,8,18,13,BOW THRUSTER,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,20,5,20,BOTTOM,
FALSE,3,0,0,1,1,FALSE,S1RPM,S1RPMSTAT
FPNL=17,7,18,12,BOW,LEFT,THR,3,0,0,1,FALSE,S1RPM,S1RPMSTAT
HSCALE=19,8,20,13,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,25,5,25,BOTTOM,FALSE,1,1,S1RPM,S1RPMSTAT
FPNLWU=22,9,24,12,DEPTH,LEFT,Depth,1000,0.1,FALSE,DEPTH,DEPTHSTAT
;LABEL=22,10,23,11,SPEED
FAPNLWU=26,8,30,10,WATER,BOTTOM,Sea Speed,51,0.0514,VERTICAL,
TOPRIGHT,FALSE,WTRSPD,WTRSPDSTAT
;GHSPNL=29,8,34,13,STERN THRUSTER,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,20,10,20,
BOTTOM,FALSE,3,0,0,1,1,FALSE,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
FPNL=32,7,33,12,STN,LEFT,THR,3,0,0,1,FALSE,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
HSCALE=34,8,35,13,-99.9,99.9,LEFT,25,5,25,BOTTOM,FALSE,1,1,S2RPM,S2RPMSTAT
;GHSPNL=35,8,40,13,RUDDER,-45,45,LEFT,10,5,10,BOTTOM,FALSE,3,0,0,57.2975,0.03491,FALSE,R1ANG,R1ANGS
TAT
;GSSPNL=34,6,40,15,RUDDER,-45,45,COUNTERCLOCKWISE,45,5,10,FALSE,3,0,0,57.2975,0.03491,FALSE,R1ANG,R
1ANGSTAT
FPNL=37,7,38,12,RUD,LEFT,ACT,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,HEADING,HEADINGSTAT
HSCALE=39,8,40,13,-45,45,LEFT,15,5,15,BOTTOM,FALSE,57.2975,0.03491,R1ANG,R1ANGSTAT
;column 3
WIND=1,16,14,20,FALSE,FALSE,RWSPD,RWSPDSTAT,RWDIR,RWDIRSTAT,RSDMAG,RSDMAGSTAT,RSDDIR,RS
DDIRSTAT,RSDSEN,RSDSENSTAT
LABEL=16,16,18,20,VOYAGE PLAN
TXTPNL=20,16,21,20,WPT,LEFT,FALSE,WAYPOINT,WAYPOINTSTAT
FPNL=22,16,23,20,BRG,LEFT,Deg,3,0,0,57.2975,FALSE,WPTBEARING,WPTBEARINGSTAT
LABEL=29,16,30,20,FINAL
TIME=34,16,35,20,ETA,LEFT, ,FALSE,WPTETA,WPTETASTAT
DATE=36,16,37,20,ETA,LEFT, ,FALSE,WPTETA,WPTETASTAT
APPENDIX B
Track Keeping and the PID Controller
The VMS-VT provides the capability to control an autopilot and guide the ship along a predetermined track on the earth (the
Voyage Plan). Because it is not generally understood how the orders to the autopilot are developed this paper will attempt to
provide a relatively simple description of that process. This will not be an analysis of the track controller, but a general
description of what is going on and how it relates to the Voyage Plan.
When the VMS-VT is controlling the track of the ship the position sensors are providing the shp's position and the heading and
speed sensors are providing the ship's velocity vector. The Cross Track Error (XTE) or distance of the ship to the left or right
of the track line is computed. This XTE is filtered to remove some noise and is used to compute the correction that will be
applied to the heading order to keep the ship on the track line. That is, if the ship is to the right of the track line then the ship
will be ordered to turn to a heading that is less than the direction of the track line. This seems simple enough, but if this
proportional (i.e., heading correction is proportional to the distance off the track line) correction were the only adjustment the
steering of the ship would be very poor.
The computation of the heading correction is in three parts. A proportional part that reacts to the distance that the ship is off
track. An integral part that reacts to the length of time that the ship has been off track. A derivative part that reacts to the rate at
which the ships is moving toward or away from the track. Each of these parts of the track keeping algorithm contribute some of
the heading correction.
The proportional part is the primary correction of the heading to make the ship move back to the track line. However, in some
situations this correction may not be sufficient to keep the ship on the track line. If there is a current that is pushing the ship off
the track line then this correction alone will steer a course that is parallel to the desired track line. Also, this correction alone
may be unstable, causing the ship to move back and forth across the track line.
The integral will provide a correction to the heading that will move the ship back to the track line even if a current is pushing it
off the line. This correction will be applied even if the VMS-VT has no direct knowledge of the current. The integral
correction is computed from the length of time that the ship is off track. Eventually this correction will be sufficient to move the
ship back to the track. Unfortunately, this correction may also make the motion of the ship somewhat unstable. Again the ship
may move back and forth across the track line.
The derivative will provide a correction that is computed from the speed at which the ship is moving toward the track line. That
is, if the ship is rapidly approaching the track line the derivative correction is large and if the ship is slowly approaching the
track the derivative correction is small. In addition, this correction is applied in a negative sense. This means that if the ship is
approaching the track line then this correction will try to slow the approach. If the ship is going away from the track line this
correction will try to bring it back. This provides stability to the track keeping process.
Each of these corrections is applied to the adjustment of the ship's heading in adjustable amounts. The adjustment of the
correction computed by each part is called the gain. Some ships may require a lot of proportional and less derivative correction
of gain. Another ship may require a different set of gains. In addition, different operation goals may require gain settings. That
is, operation in the open ocean does not demand extremely accurate control to a track line and one gain set may be used. This
would reduce rudder activity, but the ship would not stay as close to the track line. That is, the reduced rudder activity may
result in larger cross track errors or a longer time required to return to track. Operation in an extremely restricted area where
the ship must stay very close to the track line, even at the expense of additional rudder activity, will require another set of gains.
The VMS-VT allows the operator to choose from a number of these gain sets and therefore to match the control of the ship to
the operational goals. Please note, the operator can select from a list of gain sets, but only a qualified Sperry field service
technician can create the gain sets.
If you look back to the paragraph that discussed the integral part of the heading correction you will notice that the track control
adjusts for current pushing the ship off the track line even if the VMS-VT has no direct knowledge of that current. This is true,
but it is not the best way to correct for current. Every time the ship makes a waypoint turn the integral part of the heading
correction that is caused by a current must be recompute. This computation takes a period of time and during this time the ship
may be slightly off track. As the integral correction is computed the ship will move back to the track line. If the VMS-VT has
an accurate source of current then this information can be used to compute a correction to the heading. This correction is
computed as soon as the current information is available and is periodically recomputed.
There is an important difference between the VMS-VT and the previous VMS products. The VMS-VT is always working with
a track line. In the previous VMS products there were times when it was not clear to the operator what track the ship would
follow. This was true when the ship was doing a Return to Plan, when the plan was starting and when the operator chose
Waypoint mode. In the VMS-VT if the system is controlling the ship then there is a track line displayed on chart and the ship is
being moved to that track line. When the plan is started the system provides a track line that will put the ship on the voyage
plan. The operator can change the point at which the ship will join the voyage plan, the rate of turn (or radius) that will be used
to make the turns to the plan or even add temporary waypoints to adjust the way that the ship enters the voyage plan. The
operator is always aware of the path that the ship will follow.
In the previous VMS products the operator could skip a waypoint and "cut the corner" of a voyage plan. While VMS-VT
provides no direct way to select a new waypoint or to skip a waypoint this can be done in a much method. Instead of just
ordering the ship to a waypoint with no track line the operator just designates the point on the plan that the ship should join the
plan. This point could be a waypoint or any other point on the plan. A track line is displayed that shows where the ship will
sail. This "cutting of the corner" may be a single line or any number of lines. The operator is always aware of where the ship is
going.
Several safety features are provided in the VMS-VT to ensure that the ship is on the track and is actually under control:
- If the autopilot is made by Sperry then the system requires that communication be maintained while the VMS-VT is in
control.
- If the Sperry autopilot does not get messages from the VMS-VT an alarm will sound.
- If the VMS-VT does not get messages from the Sperry autopilot an alarm will sound.
- If the cross track error gets to be greater than an operator selectable limit an alarm will sound.
- If the track controller is unable to return the ship to the track then the track controller will stop controlling, sound an
alarm. This will happen if the cross track error grows greater than a configurable limit. This limit is part of the gain
sets discussed above and may be small if very accurate control is required or large if larger errors can be tolerated. If
this limit is exceeded it usually indicates that the ship some error has occured and the ship is not really under control of
the VMS. This may be caused by improper tuning of the autopilot or failure of the autopilot.
APPENDIX C
Sensor Offset Coordinate System
The various sensor managers require information about the position of the sensor relative to the ship. This position or offset is
expressed relative to the bow of the ship according to the following coordinate system:
Where :
SENSOR
X is the distance from the center line of the ship to the sensor in meters. X will be positive if the sensor is port of the center line
and negative if the sensor is to the starboard of the center line.
Y is the distance from the bow to the sensor in meters. Y will be positive if the sensor is aft of the bow.
The SENSOR position is the position of the antenna if the device is a position sensor. Proper operation of the track keeping
features of the VMS-VT is not possible unless the sensor offsets are entered properly.
APPENDIX D
1. Select the drive to be shared (e.g. C:) from the pull down drive selection box at the upper left area of
the screen directly below the menu bar.
C. Highlight the end of the drive path to be shared which will be the root for sharing.
1. Select the drive path components in order until the end of the path to be shared is highlighted either
in the left or right partition of the drive window.
1. Select the Share As icon (the third icon from left to right on the tool bar with a hand that appears to
be extending a folder).
OR
Choose Share As from the Disk pull down menu on the menu bar.
If the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL, the resulting Shared Directory box should
show:
Note: To be sure the defaults are correct or if sharing is not correctly enabled by the set up procedure
described in this document, check the following settings.
a. Select the Add button in the Access Through Share Permissions box.
b. Select the Everyone entry in the Names: list of the resulting Add Users and
Groups box, highlighting the Everyone entry.
c. Select the Add button in the Add Users and Groups box.
a. Choose Full Control from the Type of Access: pull down selection box.
b. Select the OK button in the Access Through Share Permissions box.
II. Configure all other workstations that share the PLANNING WORKSTATION drive paths set in section I.
A. Run File Manager on the workstation (e.g NAVIGATIONAL WORKSTATION) that will share PLANNING
WORKSTATION drive paths set for sharing in section I.
B. Select the Connect Network Drive icon (the leftmost icon on the tool bar).
OR
Choose Connect Network Drive from the Disk pull down menu on the menu bar.
C. Select the drive to be shared from the Drive: pull down selection box in the resulting Connect Network
Drive box.
OR
Select the drive path to be shared by selecting the drive path components in order until the end of the path to be
shared is highlighted.
Ex. If the PLANNING WORKSTATION, whose drive path is being shared, is VMS-2 and the PLANNING
WORKSTAION drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL,
OR
III. Configure VMSTART.BAT for persistant use of the shared drive paths by the PLANNING WORKSTATION so those
drives are never remapped on the PLANNING WORKSTATION.
Ex. If the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL, the following line should be added to
VMSTART.BAT:
If the connection is being made to allow PLANS, CHARTS, and NAVLINES to be moved between nodes with the VMS-VT
File Manager please read Part 3 of this Appendix.
The [SHARES] block in the config.ini tells a specific node that the named resource is to be made available to any other node. If
node (VMS-1) has a directory that is to be shared (e.g. c:\users\install) then the config.ini would include the following lines:
[SHARES@VMS-1]
install=c:\users\install,FULL
This information will make directory available to any other node as the SNARE NAME install. A block is required for EVERY
node that will make a directory available to another node.
The [CONNECTIONS] block in the config.ini tells a specific node that it must make a connection to a shared resource on
another node. If a node (VMS-2) needs to use a shared resource on another node (VMS-2, share name install) then the
config.ini would include the following lines:
[CONNECTIONS@VMS-2]
r:=VMS-1,install
This information will make a connection to VMS-1 on the share name install and assign this resource to the drive letter r.
If the connection is being made to allow PLANS, CHARTS, and NAVLINES to be moved between nodes with the VMS-VT
File Manager please read Part 3 of this Appendix.
[FILE_MANAGER]
<Drive index>=<Drive label>,<Drive name>,<Drive path>
Ex. If the PLANNING WORKSTATION IS VMS-2, and the drive path to be shared is C:\USERS\INSTALL, the
[FILE_MANAGER] block in CONFIG.INI should be defined according to the following example block.
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=Drive A,A:,\
2=VMS-2,C:,\
APPENDIX E
Preventing System Errors in a VMS-VT System Without a Keyboard
If no keyboard is attached to the NT computer when booted, it will complain that there is a keyboard problem by popping up a
service message. To prevent this message do the following in the registry editor (REGEDT32):
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
SYSTEM
CurrentControlSet
Services
KbdClass
ErrorControl=0
When ErrorControl=0 the NT system will completely ignore the keyboard if it is absent, but will use it if it is present.
APPENDIX F
Access To OSI Weather Routing Software VIA a Novell File Server
NOTE: Make ALL connections in the vmstart.bat, not with the NT File Manager (otherwise there are
startup timing problems). Add the following line to the vmstart.bat just before the line that starts the vms
program:
[FILE_MANAGER]
3=OSI,o:,\
Currently OSI has not implemented this feature. The VMS software is capable of sending this data. So the serial output
section should be disabled until then.
;
; Use this when the OSI software is ready to receive
; it. Make the
; file point to somewhere on the APL Novell network.
;
;[SERIAL_OUT_TO_FILE.VMS@vms-3]
BASE_PERIOD=30
;
; Eg. o:\osi\sperry.dat
;
FILENAME=o:\osi\sperry.dat
MSGOUT1=GLL,30
MSGOUT2=VBW,30
MSGOUT3=HDT,30
APPENDIX G
General Considerations when configuring SPEED CONTROL
1. There are always at least 2 and may be more sections for speed control:
[SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] for each LDH that is to be configured. 'x' must be an integer numbered sequentially,
starting with 1.
3. LDH_SELECTED_CHANNEL and LDH_SELECTED_SENSE configure for an external logic input signal that will tell the
speed control which LDH should be communicating with the speed control device. If only 1 LDH, this signal is not used, so
these can be omitted. This is under [SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] section.
4. Two calibration data sets for speed order, SPEED_CAL_FULL_LOAD and SPEED_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD, can be
configured for ship loading conditions. Either or both can be provided. In [SPEED_CONTROL_LDHx] section.
Appendix H
Connections to Novell File Servers that have NO Password
Connections to Novell file servers with an account that does not have a password can be tricky.
To do this you have to establish the connection in the batch file that starts the vms. This can be done with a net use command.
Unfortunatly, there is no syntax to support no password. We can fake this, however, by creating a file containing only a blank
line. Do this by running notepad, create a file called blank.txt put an empty line and save the file.
Then you have to add a line in the batch file used to start the vms in order to make the connection. This file is usually named
vmstart.bat or vmsstart.bat. The connection should be made after the sleep and before vms is started.
e.g.
Be sure to remove all connections to the server that are made by the NT file manager! Otherwise you will still get messages on
startup.
Note, this technique can be used for non-blank passwords as well. Just put the right password in the file. Of course this is not
real secure as the password is now readable by anyone who wants it! This technique also works with non-novell connections.
APPENDIX I
General Considerations when Configuring Chart Directories,
Chart Catalog, and Portfolio
With the introduction of the Chart manager with NOAA and ARCS charts in build 136 it became necessary to provide some
additional information to the VMS-VT. The system must know where to find the CD ROM drive or hard drive that holds the
chart files. These drives have become system wide resources. That is, all nodes in the system may read NOAA charts from one
CD ROM drive. In addition, the concept of a CHART CATALOG and a PORTFOLIO MANAGER were introduced. This
Appendix will describe the way in which these features must be configured.
Since it is necessary to make and maintain connections to drives and directories on several computers two new configuration
blocks have been added. These new blocks are [SHARES@node] and [CONNECTIONS@node].
[SHARES@node] allows a specijfic node in a VMS-VT system to make a resource available to other nodes. e.g. vms-1 may
have a CD ROM reader on the local drive letter d: that will be used by other nodes in the system. Before the other nodes can
use this resource vms-1 must share it:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
In addition to the entire drive, a directory (and its subdirectories) can be shared. e.g. In addition to the CD ROM reader, vms-1
will share the installation directory so that other nodes can get access to the plans, charts and navlines directories:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@node] allows a specific note to gain access to a shared resource on a node. e.g. vms-2 may need to access
the CD ROM reader and the installation directory on vms-1. This can be done by:
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
s:=vms-1,VMS
The connection that is made using the SHARES and CONNECTIONS can be used for any purpose that any local (e.g. c:) drive
can be used. e.g. {FILE_MANAGER] connections, [ARCS_CHARTS] connections, [NOAA_RASTER_CHARTS]
connetcions. The following information provides examples of each of these.
[FILE_MANAGER]
The FILE_MANAGER provides a way for one node to access files stored on another node in the VMS-VT system. Assume a
VMS-VT system with two nodes, vms-1 and vms-2. The operator wants to be able to transfer digitized charts, voyage plans,
and Navlines from one node to the other. The following configuration information makes this possible:
[SHARES@vms-1]
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-2]
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
r:=vms-1,VMS
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-2,VMS
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-1,r:,\
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-2,r:,\
The current implementation of [FILE_MANAGER] does not alloow a node name to make the block work for a specific node.
Because of this the different config.ini is required for each node. This may be changed in a future release.
[ARCS_CHARTS]
The ARCS_CHARTS block provides information to locate the source of ARCS charts in the VMS-VT system. Each node must
know the complete path to the CR ROM reader or other drive containing the charts as well as a path to a local directory that is
used by the chart handler. The following configuration is an example of a VMS-VT system with two nodes, vms-1 and vms-2.
Node vms-1 has a CD ROM reader on drive d: This block also privides information about the PERMIT that is required to use
ARCS charts.
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=d:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-2]
storage=r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
Notice that vms-1 SHARES the CR ROM drive and that vms-2 connects to that drive using r:. Also notice that the "rootDir" is
a local directory. This directory must always be local. In this case it is a subdirectory of the start up directory.
It is possible to have more than one source of ARCS charts in a system. If the system has two or more CD ROM drives then
any or all of them can supply ARCS charts. Here is a configuration with two nodes, vms-1 and vms-2. Both nodes have CD
ROM drives that will be used for ARCS charts:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-12
CDROM=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
r:=vms-2,CDROM
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[CONNECTIONS@vms-2]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-1]
storage=d:,r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
[ARCS_CHARTS@vms-2]
storage=d:,r:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
There is another way that this can be configured that requires fewer lines and therefore is somewhat simpler. This is the
preferred configuration:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-2]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
[CONNECTIONS]
r:=vms-2,CDROM
s:=vms-1,CDROM
p:vms-1,PERMIT
[ARCS_CHARTS]
storage=r:,s:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
Notice that the [CONNECTIONS] does not have a node name. Every node will process this block and make the connections.
That is, vms-2 will connect to CDROM on vms-1 AND on vms-2 and vms-1 will connect to vms-2 and to itself. With this
change the [ARCS_CHARTS] no longer needs a node name. All nodes look for charts on r: and s:.
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
The BSB section privides information about the location of NOAA and other charts that use the BSB format.
[CHART_CATALOG]
The CHART_CATALOG defines a place for storage of information required for the chart catalog feature. NOTE: This
directory MUST BE ON THE LOCAL HARD DRIVE. Here is an example of CHART_CATALOG configuration for a two
node system:
[CHART_CATALOG@vms-1]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[CHART_CATALOG@vms-2]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
Since the information for both nodes is the same this can be written:
[CHART_CATALOG]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
The PORTFOLIO_MANAGER profides storage for the portfolio feature. When chart portfolios are created they are stored in
this directory. There are two ways that the PORTFOLIO_MANAGER can be configured. The storage location can be located
on EACH computer or one compuiter can be used as portfolio storage for the the entire system. If the storage is local to each
computer then portfolios created on one computer are not usable on the other comuters. The proper method is to have only one
portfolio storage location for the entire system. This way any portfolio created on any computer is immediately available to
every computer. Here is an example of PORTFOLIO_MANAGER configuration for the two node system with the portfolio
storage on vms-2:
[SHARES@vms-2]
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
[CONNECTIONS@vms-1]
t:=vms-2,VMS
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER@vms-2]
location=folios
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER@vms-1]
location=t:
As with the previous examples we can eliminate some of the lines and make this configuration simpler:
[SHARES@vms-2]
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
[CONNECTIONS]
t:=vms-2,VMS
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
location=t:
Now we can put all of this together to show a two node VMS-VT system with two CD ROM drives, both NOAA and ARCS
charts, chart catalog on each node, and one portfolio storage for the system:
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
PERMIT=a:\,FULL
[SHARES@vms-1]
CDROM=d:\,FULL
VMS=c:\users\install,FULL
[CONNECTIONS]
r:=vms-1,CDROM
s:=vms-2,CDROM
t:=vms-1,VMS
u:=vms-2,VMS
p:=vms-1,PERMIT
[ARCS_CHARTS]
storage=r:,s:
rootDir=charts\arcs
permitTransfer=p:
[BSB_RASTER_CHARTS]
NOAA=r:,s:
[CHART_CATALOG]
LOCATION=catalog
COVERAGE_MAP=WORLD COVERAGE MAP
[PORTFOLIO_MANAGER]
location=u:
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-2,u:,\
[FILE_MANAGER]
1=DRIVE A,a:,\
2=VMS-1,t:,\
APPENDIX J
ADJUSTING ANALOG VALUES IN THE [ENGINEROOM_MANAGER] SECTION OF THE VMS-VT CONFIG.INI
FILE:
A) Two questions must be answered first: 1. What is the voltages that the analog to digital card in the VMS receives
(including whether these voltages will be + only, or +/- volts)? [The voltages coming into the isolation modules are converted
to different voltages which then go to the A/D card in the VMS - the voltage ranges going to the VMS is what is needed here.
Different conversion modules convert different inputs - which can be voltage ranges or 4 to 20 milliamp current loops- to
voltage ranges to send the VMS. These voltage ranges represent the range of values of the associated physical measuremen]
and 2. What is the range of values of the related measurement. [NOTE: The “MB31" Conversion module converts +/- 10 v
input to +/- 5 v output; the “MB32" conversion module converts 0mA to 20 mA on input to 0v / +5v on output which goes to
the A/D card in the VMS]
Examples: a rudder can be +35 degrees to - 35 degrees, or +/- 45 degrees (with negative values representing left
rudder angle); an engine RPM could have a range of 0 to 500 RPM, whereas a shaft RPM might be +/- 200 RPM; a propeller
pitch might have a range of 0 to 100%.
Furthermore, all of the above examples can be represented (at the VMS A to D board), by a range of voltages: +/- 5
volts, 0 to +5 volts, etc.
B) There are two numbers which convert the number of volts coming into the VMS to the values and units of the
related physical measurement. These are the multiplier and the offset. A simple and pure way of describing this is that the
NUMBER of volts (+ or -) are multiplied by the multiplier, and then the offset is added to give the result. The units of the result
is determined by the keyword used in the ENGINEROOM_MANAGER line (e.g. BOWTHRPITCHACT mean the actual bow
thruster pitch in percent, and R1ANG is rudder number 1's angle in RADIANS, with “-” meaning left rudder and “+” meaning
strb rudder). However, some examples are called for:
Example: on the drawings for a certain ship, the rudder angle comes into the isolation module as +/- 10 volts. The
drawing also shows that the isolation module converts this to +/- 5 volts. From some source (in this particular situation, I didn’t
know this until I was on the ship), it is determined that the ship has a 45 degree rudder (i.e. -45 degrees {left rudder} to +45
degrees). Therefore, a set of multiplier and offset must be found so that the number of volts times the multiplier plus the offset
will give the correct rudder angle (in radians!). This is what was calculated: since one volt (+ or -) equals 9 degrees [45 degrees
left would be represented by -5 volts, and 45 degrees right rudder would be shown as +5 volts], and 9 degrees is 0.157079632
radians then the multiplier is 0.157079632 and since the input is both positive and negative (volts) and the output is both
positive and negative (radians of rudder angle) then the offset is 0.0.
To help derive these two numbers (multiplier - which is the 3rd field after the “IN_” field in the line; and offset -
which is the following field), use the following formulas, (you must first determine the two things mentions in A above):
Using these formulas and the +/-45 degree rudder coming in as +/- 5 volts
: multiplier = (0.785398163 - (-0.785398163)) / (5 - (-5)) = 0.157079632
[note: +45 degrees = + 0.785398163 RADIANS - which is the
units needed]
And
Offset = 0.785398163 - (0.157079632 * 5) = 0.0.
Using these formulas for an example of a 0 to +5 volts input representing +/- 200 RPM:
multiplier = (200 - (-200)) / (5 - 0) = 80.0
[note: the units here are RPM]
C) One other point: The installer may have to fudge the multiplier (and offset?) to calibrate the actual system. For
example, in the +/-45 degree rudder example above, there was really two rudders on the ship - both were +/- 45 degree rudders
represented by +/- 5 volts coming out of the isolation module. However, I had to adjust the actual multiplier to get the rudder
angle readings on the VMS to match the actual (as per the bridge rudder angle indicators) rudder angles. The actual lines used
were as follows:
1=R1ANG,VMS@vms-2,DAS_1,IN4,0,0,0.1473,0.0,VOLTAGE
2=R2ANG,VMS@vms-2,DAS_1,IN5,0,0,0.1386,0.0,VOLTAGE
D) The breakdown of the fields in the analog line in the config.ini file is as follows:
EXAMPLE:
1=R1ANG,VMS@vms-2,DAS_1,IN4,0,0,0.1473,0.0,VOLTAGE
APPENDIX K
Information About Use of Portfolios
A Portfolio is a collection of charts. It is intended to be used by the operator to group charts that are used for a particular route
together.
For example, an operator might wish to create a portfolio of charts for a route from Genoa to Valencia. This portfolio would
contain:
charts for the Genoa harbor
charts showing approaches to the genoa harbor
charts covering the portion of the mediterranean to be traversed
charts for the approach to Valencia
charts for the Valencia harbor.
1. When a portfolio is loaded as the active portfolio, the VMS will automatically use charts within that portfolio to cover the
area shown in the main chart view. (This is the area to the left of the menu that normally shows the chart data). The VMS will
automatically select a chart from this portfolio if the view is zoomed or offset.
2. A portfolio can be associated with a voyage plan. When the voyage plan is started, the associated portfolio is used as the
active portfolio. This will enforce the behavior described in 1. When a voyage plan is running, the active portfolio is locked.
This is so that the portfolio cannot be changed when a voyage plan is running which was considered a safety problem.
Portfolios can be created in the portfolio editor. A chart may be in multiple portfolios.
NOTE: ONLY CHARTS IN THE CURRENT PORTFOLIO ARE CHECKED FOR DANGER AREAS.
APPENDIX L
VMS-VT Speed Control Calibration Procedure
General
Each Speed Control Logical Device Handler (LDH) that is configured on the VMS network must be calibrated at
installation, and the individual calibration data must be entered in each LDH section in the CONFIG.INI file. At a minimum,
calibration data for Speed Order output must be determined for each LDH. Additionally, depending on the specific type of
speed control device configured, calibration data may also be required for Throttle input. Fuel Consumption input, Propeller
Pitch input, and Rpm input are future enhancements for some speed control interfaces and are not currently implemented.
The following speed control device configurations are supported, along with the calibration procedures applicable for
each configuration:
For Speed Order output and Throttle input, two sets of calibration data for each parameter can be specified, each based
on ship loading conditions: Light and Loaded. In reality, it will be practical to measure data for only one of these conditions at
installation. Calibration data for the other condition should be measured on another voyage when actual load conditions allow.
Alternatives to measuring two sets of calibration data are to permanently use only one set of data for both conditions, or else to
estimate the calibration data for the other load condition based on data measured on the initial calibration.
1.1 Determine the load condition of the ship. Enter the following temporary data for the speed order calibration as follows
into the CONFIG.INI file, such that a speed order entered on the VMS (m/s) will be numerically equivalent to the
voltage output (volts) to the speed control device. For this example, light load is assumed. Remove or comment out
the ...FULL_LOAD calibration data, if present.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,5
1.2 Configure the speed control for manual mode such that manual speed orders can be issued from the VMS. Also,
configure to allow min speed of 0 and a max speed of 5.
MANUAL_SPEED=ON
MIN_SPEED=0
MAX_SPEED=5
1.3 Activate speed control using the Speed Control menu. Enter a speed order on the VMS, wait for the ship speed to
stabilize, then record the values of the Ordered Speed on the VMS Speed Control menu and the corresponding Ship
Speed on the VMS Main menu. Repeat this procedure until measurements have been obtained covering the entire
range of desired speeds. The VMS will not give negative speed orders, so only positive speeds are of interest. As
many points as desired can be recorded.
Example:
0.0 0.0
0.5 5.8
1.0 9.4
1.5 14.6
... ....
5.0 26.7
1.4 Replace the temporary configuration data with the measured data as follows. The points represent a piecewise linear
fit of a calibration curve from which the VMS will convert ordered speed to voltage values.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5.8,0.5,9.4,1.0,14.6,1.5,...,26.7
1.5 Ensure that the MIN_SPEED and MAX_SPEED are set to desired values.
2.1 Determine the load condition of the ship. Enter the following temporary data for the speed order calibration as follows
into the CONFIG.INI file, such that an input throttle (bridge lever) value (m/s) will be numerically equivalent to the
voltage input (volts), and that a speed order entered on the VMS (m/s) will be numerically equivalent to the voltage
output (volts) to the speed control device. For this example, light load is assumed. Remove or comment out the
..FULL_LOAD calibration data, if present.
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,5
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5,5
MANUAL_SPEED=ON
MIN_SPEED=0
MAX_SPEED=5
2.3 Do not activate speed control. This will cause the current Throttle input value to be repeated as the Ordered Speed
output on the VMS Speed Control menu. Move the Throttle to a desired position, wait for the ship speed to stabilize,
then record the values of the Ordered Speed on the VMS Speed Control menu and the corresponding Ship Speed on
the VMS Main menu. Repeat this procedure until measurements have been obtained covering the entire range of
desired speeds. As many points as desired can be recorded.
Example:
0.0 0.0
0.5 5.8
1.0 9.4
1.5 14.6
... ....
5.0 26.7
2.4 Replace the temporary Throttle configuration data with the measured data as follows. The points represent a
piecewise linear fit of a calibration curve from which the VMS will convert Throttle input voltage to speed values.
Also, restore the Speed Order calibration data to the previous values.
THROTTLE_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD=0,0,5.8,0.5,9.4,1.0,14.6,1.5,...,26.7,5.0
ORDER_CAL_LIGHT_LOAD={previous values}
2.5 Ensure that the MIN_SPEED and MAX_SPEED are set to desired values.
Not implemented.
Not Implemented
Not Implemented
APPENDIX M
Starting with build 196, VMS will permit multiple NMEA talker and sentence ids for each sensor. At this time, this is
permitted for the following two situations:
o A device that sends more than one message and the VMS needs all of them.
o A device that can send one of several messages, but only one will be sent and used by the VMS.
It will not currently function when a device can send several types of the same message simultaneously. In this case, only one
talker and sentence id should be specified.
For example, with the new Trimble GPS, the GPS will send GPGGA and GPDTM. The VMS needs to receive both messages.
The config.ini line should read
1=GPS,VMS@cascades,NMEA,2,0,0,GPGGA,GPDTM
Both messages will be processed by the system. On the other hand, a GPS system that sends both GPGGA and GPGLL at all
times must be configured for only one of the message types.
APPENDIX N
Gain configuration for builds prior to 136
Define the gain sets used to configure the PID track controller. There may be as many gain sets as
necessary. Please see APPENDIX B for a description of the PID track controller.
a text string that is the name of this gain set as it will appear on the selection list
I term for tracking control during ship travel in a turn. This term should always be 0.0.
SHARES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 75
speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-45, 72, 82-84
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 50, 58
Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 23, 24, 35-37, 54, 57
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 21, 22, 25, 40, 51, 55, 57, 87
track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-22, 27, 52, 55, 61-63, 86
VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 50
Voyage Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 40, 51, 52, 60-62, 70, 81
water speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 38, 39, 58-60
1) 1981181 sheet 1, Assembly Drawing for 26" Console. Note that drawing 1981180 (21" console) has a
similar equipment layout. Part number references are different, however.
2) 1981324, sheet 3.
3) 1982493, sheet 1.